Home

Panasonic KX-TDA100/200/600 Feature_Guide

1. d di 274 Feature Guide VPS VPS DPT Digital Integration DTMF Integration 1 24 Voice Mail Features VM DTMF Group Assignment The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX These SLT ports as well as VM DTMF Group settings must be configured to allow DTMF Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DTMF Group VM DPT Group Assignment The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX These DPT ports as well as VM DPT group settings must be configured to allow DPT Digital Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DPT Group Programming Example of Extension Port DPT Property Slot Port Port Type Extn No e Unit No Port No Type of VPS of VPS 3 1 DPT 101 VM DPT 1 1 VM DPT 3 2 DPT 102 VM DPT 1 2 Group 1 4 1 1 S Hybrid 201 VM DPT 2 1 VM DPT 4 2 S Hybrid 202 VM DPT 2 2 Group 2 5 1 SLT 301 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM DTMF 5 2 SLT 302 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 1 6 1 SLT 401 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM DTMF 6 2 SLT 402 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 2 4 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extensi
2. Example Trunk Call Sent 6 103 TI mailbox number PBX Switching to VM command Transfer with VM Transfer button extension number 103 Extension VPS In AA service mode Operator VM Port 1 x VM Port 2 T A VM DTMF i i Group Y VM Port X ran VM Port 3 d Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox The Message button light of the extension will turn on gt 1 19 1 Message Waiting thereby notifying the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the Message button light 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others Message Waiting Lamp Control When the PBxX is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS When the VPS is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button Transmitted Command In AA
3. Feature Default Type 1 Type 2 with without KX TDA30 KX TDA600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Idle Line Access Local Access 0 1 9 0 1 9 9 Trunk Group Access 8 8 8 TIE Line Access 7 7 None Redial Speed Dialling System Personal EE EE x Personal Speed Dialling Programming 30 30 30 Doorphone Call 31 EA EN Broadcasting 32 32 None Group Paging 33 33 33 External BGM on off 35 35 35 Outgoing Message OGM playback 36 36 36 record clear S CO Line Access 37 37 37 SVM Personal Greeting Message 38 None None playback record clear KX TDA30 only Parallel Telephone Mode set cancel 39 A 20 39 Group Call Pickup A0 40 40 Directed Call Pickup 41 41 41 TAFAS Calls through an External Pager 42 x42 42 Group Paging answer 43 43 43 Automatic Callback Busy cancel CCBS 46 46 46 cancel User Remote Operation Walking COS 47 47 47 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set cancel 48 48 48 Account Code Entry 49 49 49 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve 50 50 50 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a ETA 51 51 Holding Extension Number Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 52 52 Feature Guide 425 2 3 System Data Control Feature Default Type 1 Type 2 with without KX TDA30 KX TDA600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Held 53 53 53 Tr
4. Does the caller press DISA Reorder Tone time expires tone Call Retry To A The call is disconnected No Continued on next page Continued from previous page What method is assigned for DISA Intercept Routing DND Intercept Routing Busy tone OGM Does the caller press while hearing a busy tone Call Retry Busy Tone DND Tone Continuation time expires Yes The message for the DND mode is sent to the caller The call is disconnected To A The call is routed to y the intercept destination Intercept Routing DND To F y To G Condit Genera ions d WARN ING 1 17 Optional Device Features Continued from previous page The call is routed to the intercept destination Intercept Routing Busy No Is a DISA Busy Message assigned y To G The message for busy is sent to the caller To F Busy Tone DND Tone Continuation time expires Yes The call is disconnected To A Busy tone Does the caller press while hearing a busy tone Call Retry No There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Trunk to Trunk Call feature of DISA The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of t
5. Networking Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type ER a Private TIET Virtual Private Network VPN 2 ELCOT LCOT v DID v T1 LCOT v GCOT v DID y TIE E amp M v v OPX EXTN E1 DR2 Vin vi E amp M C V v E amp M P Y Ven E amp M vi y 16 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Networking Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type Public DIL DID Virtual Private Private TIE A DDI MSN Network VPN 2 BRI PRI CO Bi Vv Extension QSIG Master v QSIG Slave Vir IP GW v v Enable default vw Enable I 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 2 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method One of the following methods can be assigned to each trunk port Method Description amp Reference Direct In Line DIL gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination e g the operator Direct Inward Dialling DID Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed destination DID is also known as Direct Dialling In DDI gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to a preprogrammed destination gt 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Destination Change with the Caller s Ident
6. Installing an EMEC MEC card in the PBX allows a separate set of entries with a maximum of 8 digits to be programmed Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA3105 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 115 1 6 Memory Dialling Features User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 116 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Description An extension user can set his extension to automatically dial a preprogrammed telephone or extension number whenever he goes off hook If the Hot Line feature is set a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system programming when the user goes off hook During the Waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Hot Line feature If no number is dialled the preprogrammed number will automatically start being dialled This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling Conditions e Capable Telephone PT SLT T1 OPX and PS Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start 2 8 8 2 6
7. Number in Ss the table Feature Description 1 TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature gt 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 2 Direct Inward Dialling Refer to the DID feature gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 Direct In Line DIL Refer to the DIL feature 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 270 Feature Guide 1 22 E1 Line Service Features Number in a the table Feature Description 4 Automatic Number Outgoing ANI Identification ANI Sends the caller s number to the E1 line The sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP service 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Incoming ANI Receives the caller s number from the E1 line When the ANI number is received it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number 1 18 1 Caller ID 5 Call Charge Information The call charge meter pulses can be received during a conversation 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Conditions e Han line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company e f MFC R2 is selected as the Dial Mode the PBX always sends a dial tone instead of the telephone company when making a trunk call using E1 line Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port 2 7 26 1 1 Slot E1 Port Channel Command PT Programming Manual None Featu
8. Number in mer the Pattern Item Description 1 Date Shows the date of the call 2 Time Shows the end time of a call as Hour Minute AM or PM Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features Number in the Pattern Hem Description 3 Ext Extension Shows the extension number floating extension number etc which was engaged in the call Also shows the following codes Dxxx Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone xxx doorphone number gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Txxx Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service xxx trunk group number xxx Verified call xxx verification code 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 4 CO Trunk Shows the trunk number used for the call For patterns A and B 00 will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred 5 Dial Number Trunk Call Outgoing Trunk Call Shows the dialled telephone number Valid digits are as follows 0 through gx P Pause F EFA signal A Host PBX Access code gt 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX dot Secret dialling X Privacy dial Transferred call If the transfer destination extension enters some digits the entered digits will be added after Incoming Trunk Call Shows lt l gt the caller s identification name number It is also possible to show the DDI DID MSN call information In this case lt D gt
9. Extn 102 c Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension 1 12 1 Call Transfer The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Feature Guide 279 1 24 Voice Mail Features 280 Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Recording Recording message command H H Mailbox message command 6 H H Mailbox No No
10. Feature Description amp Reference PS Roaming by Network ICD One PS can be registered at up to 4 PBXs Using virtual PSs in an Group ICD Group all 4 PBXs can be called simultaneously to search for the PS 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Automatic Fax Transfer KX A virtual PS can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at TDA30 only another PBX connected by TIE line 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Built in Simplified Voice Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group Message KX TDA30 only provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Conditions e To use this feature call forwarding to trunks must be enabled through COS programming Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 45 1 2 Portable Station PT Programming Manual 690 PS Registration Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 302 Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features 1 26 Administrative Information Features 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Automatically records detailed information for each extension 1 SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to output the SMDR data The following devices can be connected e Serial Interface RS 232C port PC printer etc SMDR Ou
11. ENTER Used to confirm the selected item CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item PROGRAM PROG Used to enter and exit the programming mode Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode or used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone FREE R company or host PBX to access their features External Feature Access mode This button can also be used as a CANCEL button while on hook HOLD Dd Used to place a call on hold 238 Feature Guide 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage SP PHONE Used for hands free operation Also used to switch between Speakerphone ngs handset and hands free operation MONITOR Used for a hands free dialling Also used to monitor the party s voice in hands free mode MESSAGE SA Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication REDIAL fe Used to redial the last dialled number TRANSFER am Used to transfer a call to another party Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to Flexible CO Trunk a different Trunk Access button Default S CO or to another feature button INTERCOM INT Used to make or receive intercom calls Used to receive an incoming call in hands free mode or used AUTO ANS Auto E S WS Bi for microphone or handset mute during a conve
12. VM DTMF Group 2 groups x 24 channels 2 groups x 32 channels 8 groups x 32 channels TRS Barring ltem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TRS Barring Level 7 TRS Barring Denied Code 16 digits 100 entries level Feature Guide 441 3 1 Capacity of System Resources ltem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TRS Barring Exception Code 16 digits 100 entries level ARS Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Routing Plan Table 16 entries 48 entries Leading Number Table 16 digits 1000 entries Leading Number Exception Table 16 digits 200 entries ARS Carrier 10 48 Itemised Billing Code 10 digits Authorisation Code 10 digits Call Log and Message Waiting KX TDA100 Item KX TDA30 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Outgoing Call Log PT 100 records extn 1520 records system 100 records extn 240 records system 100 records extn 3200 records system Outgoing Call Log PS 100 records extn 640 records system 100 records extn 140 records system 100 records extn 2560 records system Incoming Call Log PT 100 records extn 3040 records system 100 records extn 480 records system 100 records extn 6400 records system Incoming Call Log PS 100 records extn or Incoming Call Distribution Group 100 records extn or group group Total
13. e Call Park Automatic Park Zone Button Pressing the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button e Call Park Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Recall Call Park Recall RecallDisconnect after Recall 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Park Call Park Retrieve 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide 179 1 13 Holding Features 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call 180 Feature Guide 1 13 Holding Features 1 13 3 Call Splitting Description Du
14. 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If the MSN 123 4567 is received from BRI port 1 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 01 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to MSN destination extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature the MSN service must be assigned as the distribution method for a trunk port e MSN Modification It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter which may be convenient when programming the MSN table The modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified MSN 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 J A Received MSN 87654321 gt RRS TE is 6 digits e When using point to multipoint configuration with a BRI do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels 26 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DDI DID TIE MSN Distribution Method DDI DID TIE MSN Remove Digit DDI DID TIE MSN Additional Dial 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table PT Programming Manual 421 BRI DIL D
15. Add the Authorisation code for a tenant 8 Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group l Add the Itemised Billing code H Add the dialled number after the digits are removed Home position Feature Guide 153 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 154 Programming Example Carrier Name s To 0077 0088 123 1 2 Modify Command Example Dialled number 0123456789 Trunk Access no is ignored GG 042845 6789 ww 0077 6789 12 Modification Add the number Add the Carrier Access code 0 Remove 6 digits 6 Optional Assignment Authorisation Code for a Tenant An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenant Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier 2 14 8 8 7 Authorisation Code for TRG Itemised Billing Code An ltemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code If a call is not made from an extension e g DISA or TIE and no verification code is used the Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verification code will be used 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 ARS Itemised Code 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2
16. System Password for User for PC Programming 4 10 characters System Password for Administrator for PT Programming Amia digits System Password for User for PT 4 10 digits Programming Manager Password 4 10 digits Feature Guide 443 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Programmer Code ltem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Installer Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters User Level Programmer Code 0 16 characters 444 Feature Guide 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 3 2 Exclusive Features Table The KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 support certain features only available for that PBX model The table below lists the features that are available depending on the PBX model KX TDA100 KX TDA30 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Vv Vv Dialling 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Vv Vv Number SDN Extension 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Vv 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Vv Vv w Available Feature Guide 445 3 3 Tones Ring Tones 3 3 Tones Ring Tones 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Confirmation Tone 5 Dial Tone 1 Dial To
17. 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Description Trunk calls are limited by the following features Feature Description Extension to Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Both parties will hear warning tones at five second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit When the time limit expires the line will be disconnected COS programming determines whether this feature is enabled or disabled Whether this feature applies to outgoing calls only or to both outgoing and incoming calls is determined through system programming Trunk to Trunk Call except Unattended Conference Call Duration If a call between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Both parties will hear warning tones at five second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit When the time limit expires the line will be disconnected If both parties involved in the trunk to trunk call were established by an extension e g an extension makes a trunk call then transfers the call to an outside party the time limit applied to the trunk call that was made first will be used Budget Management When the preprogrammed call charge limit has been reached an extension user will hear 3 warning tones at five second interva
18. Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD Internal 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings FWD DND Reference 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Both Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd External Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Internal 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Both Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd External Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Internal PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 1 Fixed Buttons 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 78 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 Description Answering Features Answering Features Answering Features SUMMARY An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods Destination Feature Description amp Reference PT only At the own extension Line Preference Incoming A user can select the line seized when going off hook gt 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Direct One touch A user can answer an incoming call simply by Answering pressing the flashing button Hands free A user can receive a call automatically and establish Answerback a hands free conversation
19. The delayed ringing and DND settings of the PDN extension are ignored Depending on the mode selected through COS programming SDN Direct Dial is performed in one of two ways as follows Enhanced DSS Key mode pressing the SDN button once Standard SDN Key mode pressing the SDN button twice a dial tone is heard the first time the SDN button is pressed Calls answered using the SDN button can be transferred to the PDN extension by simply pressing the SDN button once regardless of the mode Feature Guide LED Indication 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features The LED patterns and the corresponding status of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status Off This extension is idle The corresponding PDN extension is idle method that this extension is a member of Green on The extension is on a call using the PDN The extension is on a call using the SDN button button Slow green A call is on hold using the PDN button A call is on hold using the SDN button flashing Moderate e Acall ona PDN button is on Exclusive e A call answered using the SDN button is green Call Hold or consultation hold on Exclusive Call Hold or consultation flashing e The PDN extension is adding a member hold to a conference or using the line for an e The SDN extension is adding a member Unattended Conference o
20. Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 21 1 4567 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Trunk Group Access PBX 1 sends the call to PBX 2 through the trunk group TRG 2 TIE line PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 338 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 211 4567 xa e e e e e e cl e e rm TI Line Interface TRG 2 gt ji i Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 7 952 9 211 4567 or 802 952 9 21 1 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 The callis connected to the outside party 211 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 339 1 30 Networking Features b Trunk Call through Other PBXs by the ARS feature Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone
21. Type Dial for NDSS 2 10 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 2 10 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 2 15 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission 2 15 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP 2 15 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table PT Programming Manual 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor Feature Guide 375 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail 376 Description Up to 8 PBXs connected in a VoIP or ISDN private network can share the services of a VPS connected to another PBX in DPT integration This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network as if the VPS were connected to the local PBX In addition the VPS can send Message Waiting notifications to extensions at any PBX and users can access their mailboxes directly using the Message Waiting button The VPS features available at extensions in a network are shown below No Feature Remote VPS Local VPS 1 Automatic Configuration Quick Setup No Yes 2 FW
22. e When transferring a call from an analogue trunk users are strongly recommended to perform a screened transfer so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands free Answerback when the extension user is absent Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM BGM and Music on Hold Sound on Transfer 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS Transfer to CO 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 DSS Key Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Transfer Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destination 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destination PT Programming Manual 201 Transfer Recall Time 503 Call Transfer to Trunk 712 Music for Transfer Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 1 12 Transferring Features User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 175 1 13 Holding Features 1 13 Holding Features 1 13 1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold The following features are available depending on the result Feature Description Call Hold General Any extension can retrieve a held call
23. gt 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order gt 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Connecting a PC to a DPT or connecting a CTI Server to this PBX allows functions of the PC PBX and extension to be integrated so that for example detailed caller information can be taken from a database and displayed on the PC as a call arrives or the PC can dial numbers for the extension automatically gt 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI PC Phone PC Console Features This PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features combining telephone and PC such as the ability to display detailed caller information including a photograph on the screen of the PC when a call is received or to dial a telephone number automatically just by selecting a name 1 32 2 PC Phone PC Console Feature Guide 5 Voice Mail Features This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration as well as DPT Digital Integration attached locally and over a network 1 24 Voice Mail Features Parallelled Telephone Features By connecting telephones in parallel you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding add
24. oor SDN buttons CF on Extn 102 SC rapid Red Extn 101 Flashing 120 Feature Guide 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features 6 A Call From 333 3333 Arrives at Ext 102 Extn 102 Boss Extn 101 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons CT o CT o CT o Q off Co o gt C Rapid Red Extn 103 Extn 103 Extn 102 Flashing 2 Rapid Green CT o LI E Flashing STT Rapid Red gt L Rapid Red SCT Rapid Red Flashin 8 Flashing i Flashing EE Green on Extn 102 9 SEL rapid Green Extn 101 O mm Extn 101 Flashing 7 The Call From 333 3333 is Answered by Ext 103 Extn 102 Boss Extn 101 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons LL o Q oft UL o Q o LL om UL 1 Green on Extn 103 Extn 103 Extn 102 gt C Rapid Green Q o C7 o 7 Flashing CL Red On gt L Rapid Red gt Rapid Red 7 A Flashing Flashing a Green On Extn 102 __ Red On Extn 101 CT off Extn 101 8 The Call From 333 3333 is Transferred by Ext 103 to Extension 102 Extn 102 Boss Extn 101 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons PDN buttons SDN buttons CJ on a on Q on a on Q on gt O Moderate Extn 103 Ex
25. 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Description Virtual Private Network VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing line as if it were a private line There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line Public Private Discrimination a When making a call The public private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company The public private discrimination number can be dialled manually or automatically by ARS programming 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS and or TIE line service programming b When receiving a call The telephone company distinguishes the call type If it is a private call the call is received by the TIE line service method If it is a public call the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method DIL DDI MSN which is assigned on the trunk Example Public ISDN lt Public Discrimination gt 0 01 23 4567 Tonni 01 23 4567 Public No A Dials R lt Private 01 45 6789 PBX 1 Discrimination gt Gezai 4113 401 lone 1 E Private No I Extn fe Extn 9 Extn 301 Extn 302 Extn 401 Extn 402 DDI No 01 45 6789 Dials 9 01 23 UL i A 401 E E Note Public Call
26. 2 3 4 Other PBX Extn 1xxx nee e Extn 2xxx Extension Number PBX Se TIE in the Flexible Numbering Plan Ce onde cs es eens tele ts aaen aee a tee nee Feature Guide 347 1 30 Networking Features TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 348 Feature Guide The hunt sequence by dialling 2XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 Sr Sending no to PBX 2 2XXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling BXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 Sending no to PBX 2 3XXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 Sr Sending no to PBX 4 3XXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 4XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 gt Sending no to PBX 4 4XXX Priority 1 Priority 2 Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 1 0 02 1 0 2 0 03 2 0 Explanation Location 01 b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code 1 30 Networking Features 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features TIE Line Access 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Own PBX Code If you dial a 7 952 xxxx b 7 953 xxxx c 7 954 xxxx 7 TIE Line Access 8 P Extn 1xxx Number in the Extn xxxx PBX 4 TIE Line Network PBX 3 PBX Code 953 PBX Code 954 b 2nd X X953 xxxx TRG 2 GIN X954 xxxx a 952 xxxx b 1st 953 xxxx
27. COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally The original extension s TRS Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call e Trunk Call Duration The duration of a trunk call can be restricted by a system timer Trunk call duration is assigned separately for calls between an extension user and an outside party and calls between two outside parties If the timer expires the line will be disconnected 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Feature Guide 71 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features e Multiple FWD Calls can be forwarded up to four times The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD FWD Busy or Busy No Answer when the destination extension is busy or All Calls Idle Extension Hunting Overflow Intercept Routing Busy DND when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow Cpe dee Giese tee che al E call x pe GEET oo Heng Original destination In the above illustration forwarding stops at extension E However forwarding can go farther in the following cases If a destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD No Answer or Busy No Answer feature If a destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the Intercept Routing No Answer fe
28. OPX 4 Off Premise Extension An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were installed locally The SLT makes and receives a call through the PBX An extension number can be given to the OPX and extension data such as COS is also applied Example Telephone Company DEE ay 4 SLT H T1 LCOT T1 OPX T1 Card mee PBX Extn 103 B Dials 103 Extn 101 Extn 102 5 Automatic Number Identification ANI Receives the caller s number from the T1 line When the ANI number is received it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number 1 18 1 Caller ID Conditions e ifa T1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 7 20 1 1 Slot T1 Port Channel Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table Feature Guide 273 1 24 Voice Mail Features 1 24 Voice Mail Features 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Description A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX The extension ports make a group called a VM group This group has a floating extension number The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls When receiving
29. Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Remote Extension Dial Lock On 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level on Extension Lock PT Programming Manual 510 TRS Barring Level for Extension Dial Lock Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 6 4 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 2 1 1 Extension Control 142 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer Description An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS Barring level 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring for an extension user temporarily After that the extension user can make his call Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing calls e g international calls 3 Make a trunk call 2 Change TRS Barring level Leg CT Se Toll Restriction 1 Call Se Call Barring button Guest Room Manager Trunk call restricted Conditions e The modified TRS Barring level only applies to the next one call placed at the user s extension e Toll Restriction Call Barring Button A manager extension must store the desired TRS Barring level in the Toll Restriction Call Barring button A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction Call Barring button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 5 4 1 4
30. System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 391 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 2 1 2 1 1 System Configuration Hardware Extension Port Configuration Description There are three types of extension ports as follows a DPT Port DPT DSS Console Panasonic VPS DPT Digital Integration or PT interface CS e g KX TDA0141 can be connected b SLT Port SLT or Panasonic VPS DTMF Integration can be connected c Super Hybrid Port DPT APT SLT DSS Console Panasonic VPS or PT interface CS can be connected EXtra Device Port XDP of Super Hybrid Ports A DPT and SLT can be connected to one Super Hybrid port TR SLT HL DPT In this case the SLT port TR of the Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone There are two modes for the XDP port as follows Mode Description Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension They use the main telephone s DPT s extension data e g extension number COS gt 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone XDP Mode The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions To use XDP mode XDP mode must be enabled on the port through system programming Conditions Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port A DPT SLT or PT interface CS connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detect
31. User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 109 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 3 KX 1T7710 One touch Dialling Description The Message button and One touch buttons on all KX T7710 telephones connected to the PBX can be customised at once through system programming The same extension number telephone number or feature number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX T7710 useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 Programming Example Button Desired Number MESSAGE 702 Message Waiting To Call Back One touch Dial 01 100 Hotel Operator One touch Dial 02 7601 Wake up Call One touch Dial 03 102 Restaurant The MESSAGE button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication However the MESSAGE button can be programmed to perform other features The eight One touch buttons have no default setting Conditions e The KX T7710 has two modes NORMAL mode and PBX mode selected by a switch on the telephone This feature is available only when the KX T7710 is in the PBX mode e This feature is available while hearing a dial tone e Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX T7710 for additional information Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main KX T
32. d During a Conference call 1 14 1 Conference Features e During a doorphone call gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call f While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration g During Consultation Hold e This feature is not available for a trunk to trunk call via DISA Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Executive Override Deny Set Cancel 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Executive Busy Override 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings gt CO A SMDR Executive Busy Override Extension Feature Executive Busy Override Deny 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny PT Programming Manual 505 Executive Busy Override 506 Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 8 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide 125 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 3 Call Monitor 126 Description Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user s existing conversation The user can hear the conversation but the user s voice is not heard If de
33. lt Modification Flowchart gt A trunk call with the caller s information is received Checks the Table Selection Table 1 Is the area code found in local international call data in the modification table Yes e g 00987654321 1 Checks the local y international call data Checks the long distance call data Matches Data 2 Modifies the number as programmed No e g 3344556677 Removed number of digits 2 Added number 001 Modifies the number as programmed Received number 00987654321 Removed number of digits 0 A Added number 0 Modified number 66987654321 001987654321 1 Remove the 2 Add 001 first 2 digits Modification is completed een is SE 03344556677 001987654321 3 2 Caller ID Table Assignment The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table In each location of the table the following items can be assigned a Telephone number Trunk Access number caller s telephone number b System Speed Dialling name caller s name shown on the display or SMDR c CLI destination used for CLI feature When a caller s modified telephone number matches a telephone number the Trunk Access number is disregarded in the table the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination Example Location System Speed System Speed Dialling ee ee Dialling No Telephone No Name
34. 10 Cost Shows the call charge Programmable Items Hem Description Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown This setting is common throughout the PBX COS programming is also required 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Outgoing Call 804 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Incoming Call 805 SMDR Incoming Call Printing Outgoing intercom call Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Intercom Call Log in Log out status Controls whether the log in log out status is recorded gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Log in Log out ARS dial Controls whether the user dialled number or the modified number is shown The Host PBX Access code followed by the access code can be shown as supplementary information only when the modified number is selected in this setting gt 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options ARS Dial Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features ltem Description Caller s identification Controls whether the caller s identification number name number and name or nothing is shown If none is selected lt l gt wi
35. ARS lItemised Code 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code ltemised Billing Code for ARS Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e Dialled Number on SMDR It is possible to choose to print either the user dialled number or the modified number on SMDR through system programming 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options ARS Dial Feature Guide 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features e ARS Data Download Upload It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming ARS Leading Number Exception Table ARS Leading Number Table ARS Routing Plan Table 2 4 8 Tool Import 2 4 9 Tool Export This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge and the updated data can be used for multiple customers e A TRS Barring check is done before ARS is applied 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual
36. 1 and 2 are available by default 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Fixed Numbering Table available while dialling or talking Feature Fixed Numbering Pulse to Tone Conversion A Conference 3 Door Open 5 Conditions General All features have a default feature number The following are examples of feature number conflicts 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc Feature number Additional number Parameter Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 If a feature number includes X or rotary SLT users cannot use it ISDN extension users cannot use the following features OGM playback record Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve held at its own extension ISDN Hold MCID Walking Extension Call Waiting Hot Line Timed Reminder Executive Busy Override Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy CCBS e PS users cannot use the following features Personal Speed Dialling OGM playback record CO Line Access Parallel Telephone Mode set cancel
37. 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial e An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is holding a call Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY CCBS Option 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY CCBS Type CCBS delete digits PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 266 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Description An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for either trunk or extension connection When extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine PC or a behind PBX can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to point P P configuration one terminal device can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to multipoint P MP configuration a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number MS
38. 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for ISDN Service 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Dial for ISDN Service PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access Feature Guide 269 1 22 E1 Line Service Features 1 22 E1 Line Service Features 1 22 1 E1 Line Service Description The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps voice channels at 2 048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type DR2 Digital System R2 E amp M C Continuous E amp M E A M P Pulsed EA M The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the three channel types can be assigned to each of the 30 channels of the E1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 E1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table 1 2 3 4 5 Channel Type TIE DID DIL ANI Call Charge Information DR2 Vv vi Vv vi E amp M C Vv Vv vi v2 E amp M P Vv Vv Vv ke w Available Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC R2 2 Available when this PBX is connected to the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or KX TD500 D a Explanation
39. 4 PFT ports ESLC 16 4 PFT ports DHLC8 2 PFT ports SLC 8 2 PFT ports Only connect one extension card to each trunk card Note Power Failure Connections must be made within the same shelf An extension card cannot have a Power Failure Connection with a trunk card of another shelf Through system programming it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection However if no special programming is performed the connection will be dropped when power returns The BRI8 one PFT port and BRI4 one PFT port cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual KX TDA100 KX TDA200 The analogue trunk cards and extension cards as well as the number of PFT ports ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows Trunk Cards LCOT16 4 PFT ports LCOT8 2 PFT ports and LCOT4 2 PFT ports Extension Cards MSLC16 4 PFT ports CSLC16 4 PFT ports SLC16 4 PFT ports DHLC8 2 PFT ports and SLC8 2 PFT ports Only connect one extension card to each trunk card Feature Guide 433 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 434 Note Through system programming it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power failure to be maintained even
40. Analogue trunk Pay Tone KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ISDN line Advice of Charge AOC gt 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC E1 line Meter Pulse When the pay tone service is used pay tone type 12 kHz 16 kHz should be selected Call Charge Display Up to eight digits including a decimal e g 12345 78 The decimal point position the number of significant decimal digits for currency is programmable Up to three currency characters are programmable eg EUR or for Euro Through PC programming you can select whether the currency characters or symbol are placed in front of or behind the call charge e g 45 12 or 45 12 Margin Tax Rate Assignment It is possible to add a margin and a tax to the call charges The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis Calculation Method The margin or tax rate must consist of four digits two digits before and after the decimal xx xx The calculation method used by the PBX varies depending on whether the telephone company sends the meter indication or the actual call charge a Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication Meter indication received from the telephone company x Call Charge Rate X 1 Tax Rate 1 Margin Rate b Call charge with tax and margin in charge Charge received from the telephone company x 1 Tax Rate 1 Margin Rate The calculation result is ro
41. Busy DND Message No DISA Security Mode and Available Features If the DISA AA service is not employed the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers To prevent others from accessing the PBX features it is possible to assign DISA security 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System DISA Security DISA Security Mode 732 DISA Security Mode The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows Security Mode ee S ds Ge Trunk Call Without PBX Code With PBX Code All Security Trunk Security Vv Vv No Security Vv Vv Vv v w Available If trunk call is available Account Code Entry gt 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry is also available Note DISA AA service and Operator Call 2 2 5 Operator Features are available for any security mode Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry If the caller performs Verification Code Entry 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode Entry method Verification Code Entry feature number verification code verification code PIN After changing mode the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call DISA Intercept Routing Busy If the first destination called by the outside party is busy the call is redirected as follows a The call is redirected to the Intercept Routing Busy desti
42. CLI Destination 000 90123456789 ABC Company 200 001 Feature Guide 227 1 18 Caller ID Features I 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial CO Line Access Number Telephone Number 001 System Speed Dialling Number 2 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Name 002 System Speed Dialling Name 3 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial CLI Destination 3 3 Caller s Name Reference A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR The PBX searches for the name in the following order 1 Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension 2 System Speed Dialling Caller ID Table 3 Caller ID name received from the public line Caller ID Name Reference If the name is not found it will not be displayed Conditions General e Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming e The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network Caller ID to SLT Port e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An EXT CID card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 An SLC8 card with an EXT CID card installed or a CSLC16 card KX TDA600 An SLC8 card with an EXT CID card installed e This feature complies with ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute type FSK and Bellcore type FSK e KX TDA30 only Through system programming a group of four SLT or Super Hybrid ports can be assigned to receive Caller ID Up to two groups can be programmed Therefore a maximum of eig
43. COLP CONP Example 1 Dials 203 E _ Called party a Extn No 203 V PBX 1 PBX 2 Extn Name Tom 2 wo IRNA etc Caller COLP 204 Answering party 3 Paul CONP Paul Extn No 204 204 J Extn Name Paul is displayed 2 Answers the call CLIP COLP Number The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming CNIP CONP Name The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP CONP can be assigned for each extension through system programming Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Calling Connected Name Identification Restriction CNIR CONR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network When CLIR is activated CNIR becomes active automatically When COLR is activated CONR becomes active automatically Conditions e These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications CLIP COLP ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services CNIP CONP ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services e COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled
44. COS Settings CO amp SMDR Call Monitor 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Data Mode Option 3 Executive Override Deny 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny PT Programming Manual Feature Guide 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 127 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 8 4 1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Description When attempting to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation an extension user can send a Call Waiting indication to the busy extension Call Waiting The notification receiving method depends on the called extension s personal setting and the telephone type Notification Receiving Method Description amp Reference Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Off hook Call Announcement Talk with the busy extension using the built in speaker and microphone OHCA of the called extension while the existing call is made using the handset 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard directly by only the called extensio
45. DDI DID MSN name number is added before lt l gt Outgoing Intercom Call Shows the dialled extension number followed by EXT Log in Log out Shows the log in or log out status Check in Check out Shows the check in or check out status gt 1 27 2 Room Status Control Timed Reminder Shows the status of a timed reminder either Start No Answer or Answer gt 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Shows the selected message 1 26 2 Printing Message Sensor Call Shows calls from an external sensor as follows lt l gt S sensor number 1 17 9 External Sensor Feature Guide 305 1 26 Administrative Information Features 306 Number in ae the Pattern Item Description 6 Ring Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes Seconds 7 Duration Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours Minutes Seconds 8 Acc Code Shows the account code appended to the call gt 1 5 4 3 Account Account Code Code Entry 9 CD Condition Shows other call information with the following codes Code CL Collect call TR Transfer FW FWD to trunk DO Call using DISA or TIE line service RM Remote maintenance modem 2 3 1 PC Programming NA Not answered call RC Received call AN Answered call VR Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID VA Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID
46. Data Line Security Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Log in Log out Log in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared Paging Deny Allow Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring Hot Line Off Timed Reminder Cleared Note The features with can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear Conditions e Extension Dial Lock 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock and the extension personal identification number PIN 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN will not be cleared by this feature e For Users in Canada only If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear After performing Extension Feature Clear Call Waiting will be enabled if Extension Clear Call Waiting is set to Clear through system programming In this case dial tone 2 will be heard when going off hook gt 1 29 1 Dial Tone Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension Feature Clear 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Extension Clear Fwd DND 324 Feature Guide 1 28 Extension Controlling Features Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 8 13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear Feature Guide 325 1 28 Extension Conirolling Features
47. Explanation The PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number If a dialled number is not found at the local PBX the call can then be sent to a remote PBX and the remote PBX checks the TIE Line Routing Table for a corresponding entry Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 1011 The dialled number is found at the local PBX so extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 1 Case 2 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 1033 The dialled number is not found at the local PBX so the call is redirected to the specified TIE 354 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Line and extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1033 of PBX 2 Case 3 A public trunk call directed to extension 1033 arrives at PBX 1 The target extension number is not found at the local PBX so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line and the call is connected to extension 1033 of PBX 2 Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version System programming is required to enable this feature Ifa dialled number is not found at a remote PBX the call cannot be redirected to the local PBX to search for a matching number e When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting the caller will hear a busy tone If required Intercept Routing Busy DND can be act
48. Extension PIN Lock 322 Extension Port Configuration 392 Extension Release Automatic 86 Extension User Group 396 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 166 External Feature Access EFA 164 External Relay Control 223 External Sensor 221 EXtra Device Port XDP 392 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 433 Fax Transfer Automatic 213 Feature Clear Extension 324 Feature Highlights 5 First Party Call Control 385 Fixed Buttons 238 Flash Recall Terminate 162 Flexible Buttons 241 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 423 Floating Extension 430 Floating Station gt Floating Extension 430 Full One touch Dialling 109 FWD gt Call Forwarding 69 70 FWD Multiple 72 FWD DND Button Types 76 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button 76 FWD DND Setting by Fixed FWD DND button 77 FWD AII Calls 70 FWD Busy 70 FWD Busy No Answer 70 FWD FollowMe 70 FWD No Answer 70 69 74 Feature Guide 467 Index G Group 396 Group Call Distribution 51 Group Call Pickup 81 Group FWD Button Types 76 Group Broadcasting 191 Group Call Pickup 81 396 Group Extension User 396 Group Idle Extension Hunting 45 397 Group Incoming Call Distribution 47 397 Group Paging 188 397 Group PS Ring 293 398 Group Trunk 396 Group Voice Mail VM 274 398 H Handover 291 Handset Headset Selection gt Headset Operation 159 Hands free Answerback 83 Hands free Operation 156 Headset Operation 159 Hold Recall 176 Hold
49. Extension Settings Option 6 Outgoing Call Log Memory 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 Outgoing Call Log Memory PT Programming Manual 205 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 206 Automatic Redial Interval Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 3 Redial 1 13 1 Using the Call Log 112 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Description An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data or the PBX system data Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling Conditions General Any number e g telephone number feature number can be stored in a speed dialling number A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming and System Speed Dialling number Call Directory Speed Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent the numbers from being viewed at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Incoming Outgoing Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked and the voice messages in the user s message box cannot be played back An extension persona
50. Flexible Button 58 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up PT Programming Manual 628 Queuing Call Capacity 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 630 Queuing Time Table 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide References 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 9 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection Feature Guide 59 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 5 VIP Call 60 Description It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly Example In the call centre incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode wh
51. Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features TAFAS Answer 2 8 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Paging EPG 1 External Pager 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Paging EPG External Pager KX TDA30 only 2 11 2 5 2 External Pager PT Programming Manual 700 External Pager Floating Extension Number User Manual References 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Feature Guide 197 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Description A PT user can listen to BGM through the built in speaker while on hook and idle BGM External BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager Conditions BGM e Hardware requirement A user supplied external music source such as a radio e The music through the PT is interrupted when going off hook e KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Each user can set cancel BGM and also select the music source e KX TDA30 only Each user can only set cancel BGM the user cannot make a music selection BGM Extern
52. Lunch start 12 05 NONE 13 00 13 00 Day 2 start 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NONE Break 1 end Day restart NONE NONE NONE NONE Night start 16 31 20 00 17 00 NONE i R R S M lt Time Service Image of Monday gt Time Table Nolon on 08 00 11 00 12 0013 00 16 00 20 00 24 00 08 00 3 Features Using Time Service The following features can be set in each time mode day lunch break night a b c d e f g h i Feature Guide Destination of incoming trunk calls DIL DID DDI MSN 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features Destination of the Intercept Routing 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups gt 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Destination of incoming doorphone calls gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call PBX operator 2 2 5 Operator Features COS for TRS Barring and for Trunk Access Outgoing Message OGM for Timed Reminder 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Intercept time for Intercept Routing No Answer 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing and for DISA Intercept Routing No Answer gt 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 2 System Configuration Software Programming Examples of DID DDI Table and DIL Table DID DDI table can be programmed for each DID DDI number and a tenant Time Ta
53. Patt 8 Si attern OFF Patt 9 ay attern OFF ON Pattern 10 OFF 234 Feature Guide 1 19 Message Features Pattern 11 Pattern 12 e Itis possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone busy tone or DND tone e Messages are always left on the original destination extension regardless of that extension s FWD settings e Both the extension that sent and received a message waiting notification can cancel the left message e Ifthe extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification and the call is answered the notification will be cleared automatically However if a voice message has been left on the VPS whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 4 1 1 Slot Extension Card Property SLT Power Supply KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Message Waiting Set 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Option 5 SLT Message Waiting Lamp Pattern KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Command Listening Message 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main SLT MW Mode KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 10 5 4 1
54. System Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Programming 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 2 10 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant System Speed Dial PT Programming Manual 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 1 13 1 Using the Call Log 1 13 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Description An extension user can access an extension or feature by simply dialling a 1 4 digit Quick Dialling number Conditions General e Quick Dialling is convenient in cases such as the following Room service calls in a hotel Calling another branch via the public network e Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan gt 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e The following example shows how Quick Dialling numbers can be stored and utilised Location No Quick Dialling No Desired Number Quick Dialling 01 110 9110 Trunk Call Quick Dialling 02 5 3016 Room Service Quick Dialling 03 2011 90123456789 Another Branch
55. TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Centralised VM 2 15 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission 2 17 1 11 1 Main Maintenance Error Log for Centralised VM Network MSW Transmission Counter Error Log for Centralised VM Network MSW Transmission Buffer Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 6 Network ICD Group Description An Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group can include up to 4 destinations at other PBXs in a private network including the floating extension number of another ICD Group This is done by assigning a virtual PS as a member of the ICD Group and then setting the number of a destination at another PBX as the forwarding destination for that virtual PS This allows multiple ICD groups at remote locations to receive calls together Telephone Company Private network ICD Group Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in the PBX that will support virtual PSs e The conditions for 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group also apply to this feature Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual Feature Guide 379 1 30 Networking Features 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller to SDN
56. Transfers a call to the QSIG network 1 30 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG network becomes free 1 30 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Feature Guide References 1 21 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Feature Guide 363 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP 364 COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Description Calling Line Name Identification Presentation CLIP CNIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number and or name on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Name Identification Presentation COLP CONP The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number and or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered CLIP CNIP Example 2 John H n n 101 1 Dials 202 is displayed 1 CLIP 101 CNIP John 2 ii Caller Called party Extn No 101 Extn No 202 Extn Name John
57. Walking Extension BGM set cancel Timed Reminder e Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 2 to 4 digits e APS can only be assigned an extension number of 4 digits or less Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Extension Features Other PBX Extension 2 8 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature PT Programming Manual 100 Flexible Numbering Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 4 2 1 Feature Number Table Feature Guide 429 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 7 Floating Extension Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc This feature is also known as Floating Station Resource Description Default Device External Pager Used as the destination for TAFAS feature gt 600 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Outgoing Message Used to send messages for DISA feature gt 5 two digit OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA OGM number Built in Simplified Used to access message boxes associ
58. allows the use of the BGM feature 1 17 4 Background Music BGM while assigning a separate external music source e g company message advertisement to Music on Hold BGM Number and the Music Source BGM No Music Source 1 External music port 1 2 External music port 2 internal music source 1 or internal music source 2 Separate music sources can be assigned for the Music on Hold and the BGM features KX TDA30 Only one external music port is available If BGM is selected it is possible to select whether external music port internal music port 1 or internal music port 2 is assigned to BGM Conditions Hardware Requirement User supplied music source when an external music source is assigned e Volume Control It is possible to change the volume of an internal and or external music source e Each tenant can select a music source to use for Music on Hold The type of call determines which tenant s music source is used as follows Type Music Source Incoming Intercom Calls Selected based on the tenant setting to which the extension Outgoing Calls user belongs Selected based on the tenant setting of the distribution method Incoming Trunk Calls DIL DID DDI MSN After finishing an incoming trunk call if an extension user makes another call using the FLASH RECALL gt 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate or EFA button 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA 182
59. and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 4 EIO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 4 EIO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 39 1 1 Slot OPB KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Device Type Feature Guide 223 1 17 Optional Device Features 2 7 43 1 1 Slot DPH Card Property KX TDA30 only For Output ElIO Device Type 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features External Relay Access 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature External Relay Access 2 11 6 5 4 External Relay PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 10 2 If an External Relay is Connected 224 Feature Guide 1 18 Caller ID Features 1 18 Caller ID Features 1 18 1 Caller ID Description The PBX receives caller information such as the caller s name and telephone number through the trunk This information can then be shown on the displays of PTs PSs or SLTs that support FSK type Caller ID The PBX can modify a received number according to preprogrammed tables so that an extension user can easily use the received number to call the caller back For example if an area
60. when ICD Group with Cellular Phone PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 25 6 Virtual PS 380 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Description One PS can be registered to up to 4 PBXs in a private network and a Network ICD group created for the PS at each PBX with virtual PSs set to forward to the other PBXs in the network When a call to the PS is received at one of the PBXs the call rings simultaneously at all PBXs in the network to which that PS is registered Telephone Company Private network Be Fe TI ER ooo gt Virtual PS3 Each virtual PS is set to forward calls to the extension number of the actual PS as registered at one of the other PBXs Then an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group is created containing the registered PS and the virtual PSs When a call is received at one of the PBXs it is forwarded to all of the other PBXs One private network channel is used to forward an incoming call to one other PBX Therefore if a PS is registered at 3 other PBXs 3 private network channels are needed to forward a single call to all of the PBXs Each PBX can store the current communication status of each PS In Range or Out of Range If the status of the PS is set to Out of Range when a call is received the call will be refused and the private network
61. 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No PT Programming Manual 204 Hot Line Waiting Time Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 117 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features 1 7 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Description Primary Directory Number PDN buttons and Secondary Directory Number SDN buttons are ideal for use between bosses and secretaries When a call intercom or trunk arrives at a PDN button on the boss s extension the call will ring and the LED of the SDN button will flash at the secretary s extension as well indicating that an incoming call is arriving at the boss s extension In addition caller information e g Caller ID of the incoming call will appear on the secretary s extension The secretary can answer the call for the boss by simply pressing the SDN button Delayed ringing can be set for a PDN or SDN button A secretary can hold a call answered on the SDN button and the boss can retrieve the held call simply by
62. 1 11 Conversation Features 170 DPT DPT e Capable Telephones KX T7600 series except KX T7640 Note that the KX T7667 can only be connected as a slave DPT e When Digital XDP connection enables the number of DPTs to exceed the maximum capacity that the PBX supports the following conditions must be met KX TDA30 An MEC card is installed and an additional AC adaptor is connected KX TDA100 KX TDA200 An MEC card and the PSU M or PSU L is installed KX TDA600 The PSU L is installed e When using Digital XDP connection the following features cannot be used with either the master or slave DPT a OHCA A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set b USB Module The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module is connected Do not connect USB Modules to the DPTs Note Even if the slave DPT is disconnected the OHCA feature and USB Module still cannot be used with the master DPT To use them the master DPT must be disconnected from the PBX and then reconnected DPT DPT SLT e When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode the SLT works as the parallel extension of the master DPT Installation Manual References KX TDA30 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA3105 2 6 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 2 6 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 2 7 2 Parallel Connec
63. 1 28 3 Walking Extension Description It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you Settings such as extension number one touch dialling memory and COS are all available to you at the new location Example This feature is useful when e Moving location e There is no specific desk for your use This feature is also known as Walking Station Conditions General e This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PTs including IP PTs and SLTs Moving between tenants is also possible e Incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location e An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Ifa DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after Walking Extension has been activated the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming e If PC programming is being performed for extensions whose extension settings are being transferred by the Walking Extension feature the Walking Extension feature may not work properly 2 3 1 PC Programming Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Walking Extension 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN 2 10 17 4 3 DSS C
64. 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback At another extension Call Pickup Directed Group A user can pick up a specified extension s call or a call in a specified call pickup group 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Feature Guide 79 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 2 80 Description Line Preference Incoming A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Incoming KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA6O00 only Type Description No Line Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off hook PDN Answers a call arriving at a Primary Directory Number PDN button simply by going off hook This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Prime Line Answer a call arriving at a CO or ICD Group button on which the Prime Line is assigned simply by going off hook This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously Ringing Line default Answer the longest ringing call at one s telephone simply by going off hook when multiple calls arrive Conditions Prime Line e The priority of the incoming call is as follows 1 The call arriving at a button
65. 1 6 1 4 1 6 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 1 8 1 8 1 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 1 8 4 1 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 3 1 8 4 4 1 9 1 1 9 2 1 9 3 1 9 4 1 9 5 1 9 6 10 1 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 12 12 1 13 13 1 AER 13 3 13 4 1 14 wech sch sch sch wb sch gh sch sch sch sch sech sch sch sech sch sch mb sech Special Carrier Access Code 100 Seizing a LING EE 101 Seizing a Line Features GUMMAPNY tutkunu AtEntEEAt EAEn nEn nEn EnntEntEnnn nenne nenne nne 101 Line Preference 0utgoin g iesise iti ae lao ic ML edie 102 lte 103 Memory Dialling FO atureS wiiscccccsctscstisassctacsiensssanstanaaissssensnesadsanseccusansezsasaccuessazansnaansnaae 106 Memory Dialling FEAUUheS c ci cuscse2crecceseesussatsutedcecsanndilaccadedanepa se cagnleutensanednaianeiauiauienares 106 Memory Dialling Features GUMMAPNY A 106 One toOUCh Dialling inre ieaie eare iienaa reiia ana ERA Eiro a A ean i ii iane ie iior ieii 109 KX T7710 One touch Dialling ec cee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeessaeeeaeecsaeeeaeeseaeesaaeseesneeeseeeseaeesiaeseeeeeees 110 Esia Taala a E10 TE E E E N E A E S A 111 Speed Dialling Personal System ccccsccceeseeceesneeeeseeeeceeeeeseaeeeeceaeeeseaeeescaeeeseaaeeseeeesueeessceeeseeeeesseeeeas 113 Coulee Dna eds es ede cin cde tad vseha teh esd essence eth cast caddel eseaziadin aya chbcsdepuecaslendeSscaeoteidzac Gattadts te
66. 1 6 Intercept Routing e 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e 1 9 5 Walking COS e 1 13 4 Music on Hold e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 464 Feature Guide Index Feature Guide 465 Index A AA gt Automated Attendant 203 Absent Message 236 Account Code Entry 91 Advice of Charge AOC 257 Alarm Information Local 436 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 87 Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override 83 Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 87 ANI gt Automatic Number Identification 225 Answering Features 79 Answering One touch Direct 79 AOC gt Advice of Charge 257 Appendix 439 ARS gt Automatic Route Selection 150 Audible Tone Features 329 Authorisation Code 154 Automated Attendant 203 Automatic Call Hold 176 Automatic Call Park 179 Automatic Call Waiting 43 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 124 Automatic Extension Release 86 Automatic Fax Transfer 213 Automatic Log out 65 Automatic Number Identification ANI 225 Automatic Privacy 187 Automatic Redial 111 Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks 358 Automatic Route Selection ARS 150 Automatic Setup 421 Automatic Station Release gt
67. 1 Dial Tone Feature Guide 219 1 17 Optional Device Features 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 3 2 Exclusive Features Table User Manual References 1 6 2 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM KX TDA30 only 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 220 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 9 External Sensor Description External sensing devices such as security alarms or smoke detectors can be connected to the PBX When the PBX receives input from a sensor a call is made to the preset destination alerting the extension user The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows Available Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS v Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code When the call is answered if distinctive dial tones are enabled dial tone 3 is heard and continues until the user goes on hook If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time the call will be cancelled It is possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from
68. 2 4 8 Tool Import ARS Leading Digit ARS Except Code ARS Routing Plan 2 4 9 Tool Export 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Dial Tone for ARS 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 ARS Itemised Code 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 ARS Itemised Code 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code ltemised Billing Code for ARS 2 14 8 ARS 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options ARS Dial PT Programming Manual 320 ARS Mode 321 ARS Leading Number 322 ARS Routing Plan Table Number 325 ARS Exception Number 330 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 331 346 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 347 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 48 KX TDA600 only 350 ARS Carrier Name 351 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access 352 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 353 ARS Carrier Access Code Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 155 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 1 Hands free Operation 156 Description A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset Pressing specific buttons e g REDIAL automatically activates hands free mode Conditions e PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands free mod
69. 2048 records system Total 6400 records system Message Waiting PS Incoming Call Distribution Group 208 SI Message Waiting PT SLT 256 512 1032 Voice Message Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Outgoing Message OGM 32 64 OGM Total Recording Time 8 minutes Pairin simpltticd voice Message 125 messages card not available SVM SVM Total Recording Time 40 60 or 120 minutes depending on the recording not available quality 442 Feature Guide 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Hospitality and Charge Management Features Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 ES Billing items for guest rooms only available w EMEC or MEC 1000 records PBX 4000 records PBX 8000 records PBX Hotel Operator 4 Charge Rate 7 digits including a decimal Charge Denomination 3 currency characters symbols Networking Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 32 entries Leading Number 3 digits PBX Code 7 digits NDSS Monitored PBXs 8 NDSS Registered Extensions for Monitor PBX 250 CTI Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 PC Console 2 8 PC Phone 24 64 128 Password Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 System Password for Installer 4 10 characters System Password for Administrator for PC Programming 4 10 characters
70. 25 15 Number Feature Guide 423 2 3 System Data Control 424 Feature Default Type 1 Type 2 with without KX TDA30 KX TDA600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Extension Numbering Scheme 7 Leading None 16 26 16 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 8 Leading None 17 27 17 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 9 Leading None 18 28 18 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 10 None 19 29 None Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 11 None 20 30 20 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 12 None 21 31 21 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 13 None 22 32 22 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 14 None 23 33 23 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 15 None 24 34 24 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 16 None 25 35 25 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 17 None 26 36 26 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 18 None 27 37 27 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 19 None 28 38 28 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 20 None 29 39 None Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 21 5 5 5 5 19 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 22 6 6 6 6 29 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 23 64 None None None Leading Number Operator Call 9 0 9 0 0 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control
71. 294 Feature Guide Log in log out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded 1 25 Portable Station PS Features PS Ring Group Incoming Call Distribution Group s e lr e e When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number However the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number e Ifa PS ina PS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls the PS will not ring when an intercom call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND e Forcalls directed to PS ring groups the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously The third call cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Distribution Method 2 9 22 3 9 PS Ring Group 2 9 23 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List PT Programming Manual 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 295 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 3 PS Directory Description A PS user can store numbers and or names in the directory A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in t
72. 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call etc Ring Tone Patterns 1280 ms Single Double Triple S Double The duration of a ring tone may vary by country area Ring Tone Pattern Table The ring tone pattern table is categorised into three parts each containing a specified number of pattern plans The ring tone pattern table is categorised as follows e Incoming Trunk Calls each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group 2 8 14 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO e Incoming Doorphone Calls each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone 2 8 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone e Others each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring tones assigned to certain features e g timed reminder 2 8 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that extension through system programming Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table Table Recall oorprnone va Timed External No Call Hold Reminder Call Back LCS Sandor Recall TRG1 TRG2 Port1 Port2 1 Double Single Single 2 Single Double Double Co
73. 366 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 367 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Description The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call the following situation will be possible Example QSIG Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network The call is transferred from extension Transferred 2000 to extension 1001 of PBX 1 tOM OOI The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is mp a released and the call is connected JS E j directly to the transfer destination of Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 extension 2000 Dials 2000 EE Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 EE Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 261 Call transfer su
74. 372 QSIG Port Setting Monitored PBX ISDN QSIG PBX Direct Connection Each QSIG port of a BRI or PRI card that will be used to transmit extension status information must be set to do so through system programming Even if a port is set to not transmit information it will still receive information from other PBXs 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN CO Networking Data Transfer 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Networking Data Transfer Transmit Extension Status Information Functions Enabled e Transmit information on own PBX extensions e Receive information from other PBXs forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX e Re transmit information received by other QSIG ports of the PBX Disabled Receive information from other PBXs forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX Set the transmission setting for each port according to the layout of your network so that extension status information can travel between NDSS monitor PBXs Example ISDN Network Port Setting wanes Network ID 1 4001 NDSS Idle 4 Busy 4001 Idle gt Busy IP GW QSIG IP data is routed through the network according to the routing tables of the IP GW cards When using VolP it is necessary to identify the monitor PBXs to which to transmit extension status information for each card that will be used This is done by specifying the extensi
75. 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 10 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 235 1 19 Message Features 1 19 2 Absent Message 236 Description An extension user can set or select a message eg the reason for absence to be displayed on his telephone When a display PT user calls the extension the message is shown on the caller s telephone The following messages can be programmed as desired Type a Message Example Description System 1 Will Return Soon Messages may be edited through message a S system programming They are used ORG eee for every extension user commonly 3 At Ext Extension Number 4 Back at Hour Minute 5 Out until Month Day 6 In a Meeting 7 8 Personal 9 A message is programmable at each message extension through personal programming Personal Absent Message which can only be used by that extension user Note The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension Up to seven s can be stored for each message Conditions e An extension user can select
76. 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny PT Programming Manual 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup 82 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Description A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset If the user receives a call while in Hands free Answerback mode a hands free conversation is established using one of the following methods Type Answering Method Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone Trunk Call Established after a specified number of rings a called extension hears a beep tone Conditions Hands free Answerback applies to Intercom calls and trunk calls including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Hands free Answerback for Trunk Calls System programming is required to use this feature Hands free Answerback for Calls From an Extension That Placed a Trunk Call on Consultation Hold Calls from an extension that placed a trunk call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature as either intercom calls or trunk calls
77. 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features MCID PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID Feature Guide 265 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Description If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS supplementary service e This feature is available under the following conditions a The caller s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS e To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming e An extension user can set only one CCBS The last setting is effective e The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds e After using the CCBS feature using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS gt
78. 9876543210 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 ABC COMPANY12345678 00 01 05 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 123 00 01 05 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 123456XX 00 12 05 98765 01 02 02 08 33AM 1234 In the office 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 LOG IN 01 02 02 03 35PM 1234 LOG OUT 01 02 02 03 45PM 1234 EXT1235 01 02 02 03 50PM 1234 Check in 01 02 02 03 55PM 1234 Check out 01 02 0204 00PM 1234 Timed Reminder Start 01 02 0204 01PM 1234 Timed Reminder No Answer 01 02 0204 01PM 1234 Timed Reminder Answer 01 02 0204 05PM 1234 lt l gt S003 RC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pattern B 80 digits with call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 2 20 8 8 2 10 3 01 02 0210 03AM 1210 01 lt l gt NA 01 02 0210 07AM 2005 01 12345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EU 9876543210 1 2 B 4 5 7 10 8 9 Pattern C 120 digits Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 4 50 4 8 8 3 10 3 01 02 02 10 03AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EUR 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 07AM 1230 0001 lt I gt ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0 05 00 00 05 9876543210 TR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 8 9 Explanation The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples For the programmable items refer to the following Programmable Items
79. AN Room status Controls whether room status changes are shown gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Timed Reminder call Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown gt 1 28 4 Timed Reminder gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Timed Reminder Wake up Call Printing Message Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension gt 1 26 2 Printing Message 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel A Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Time format Controls whether time is displayed in 12 hour or 24 hour format 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Format Time Format 12H 24H Feature Guide 307 1 26 Administrative Information Features 308 Conditions SMDR Format The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer a Page Length determines the number of lines per page 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Format Page Length Number of Lines 802 SMDR Page Length b Skip Perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Format Blank Footer Length Number of Lines 803 SMDR Skip Perforation The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length Explanation O eet as
80. Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 13 3 7 3 Special Carrier Code PT Programming Manual 303 Special Carrier Access Code Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 100 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 Seizing a Line Features 1 5 5 1 Seizing a Line Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods Feature Description amp Reference Line Preference Outgoing A user can select the line to be seized when going off hook gt 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Trunk Access A user can select the Trunk Access method every time he makes a trunk call 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Feature Guide 101 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Description Through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing PT users can select the outgoing line they prefer to originate calls on when going off hook from the following line preferences Line Preference Description ICM PDN When an extension user goes off hook an extension line is selected automatically If the extension is a PDN extension the first available Primary Directory number PDN button is selected automatically gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directo
81. Access No Extension No Going on hook These operations must be performed when the held call is intended to be retrieved from another extension using the holding extension number If the following occurs frequently with an SLT choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 a When an SLT user receives a call reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call b When an SLT user goes off hook reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone If a call is not terminated after going on hook the above cases occur To avoid these problems choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2 Mode 3 and Mode 4 Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones Feature Guide 1 13 Holding Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Hold Recall Recall Disconnect after Recall 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Holding Extension Number Hold Retrieve Specified with a Held CO Line Number 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Automatic Hold by ICM CO ICD Group key Option 1 PT Operation Hold Key Mode Option 5 SLT SLT Hold Mode PT Programming Manual 200 Hold Recall Time User Manu
82. Answer es No Answer Time The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension Follow Me e This feature is only available when the original extension has disabled the Deny Remote Operation by Other Extension setting on a COS basis Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features FWD No Answer Timer Set 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS Call Forward to CO Extension Feature Group Forward Set Extension Feature Remote Operation by Other Extension 2 9 1 8 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time Extension CO Duration Time 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Log Group FWD 2 10 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 2 10 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND PT Programming Manual 472 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 504 Call Forwarding to Trunk 605 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 73 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 3 74 Do Not Disturb DND Description An extension user can make use of the DND feature If this feature is set calls will not arrive at the extension
83. Automatic Extension Release 86 B Background Music BGM 198 Barring 133 BGM gt Background Music 198 BGM External 198 Billing Code Itemised 154 Billing for Guest Room Calls 319 Block Internal Call 38 Boss amp Secretary feature 72 Broadcasting 191 Broadcasting Group 191 Budget Management 141 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 215 Busy on Busy 62 Busy Override Deny Executive 125 Busy Override Executive 125 Busy Station Signalling BSS gt Call Waiting 43 Buttons Fixed 238 Buttons Flexible 241 Buttons PS Feature 297 C Call Billing for GuestRoom 319 Call Charge Management 313 Call Charge Services 312 Call Directory Extension Dialling 87 466 Feature Guide Call Directory Speed Dialling 113 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 258 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 260 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 366 Call Forwarding FWD 69 70 Call Hold 176 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN 262 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 176 Call Hold Automatic 176 Call Log Incoming 230 Call Log Outgoing 111 Call Monitor 126 Call Park 179 Call Park Recall 179 Call Park Retrieve Deny 179 Call Pickup 81 Call Pickup Group 81 396 Call Pickup Directed 81 Call Splitting 181 Call Transfer 173 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 263 Call Transfer CT by QSIG 368 Call Transfer with Announcement 173 Call Transfer without Announcement 173 Call Transfer Screened gt Call Transfer with An
84. COLR features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service e The CLIP COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP COLP number such as a doorphone e COLP CLIR COLR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button e The CLIP COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number e When using a private network the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming is sent for CLIP COLP gt 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI
85. Call 76 76 76 Timed Reminder set cancel 760 760 760 Printing Message 761 761 761 Extension Dial Lock set cancel 77 77 77 Time Service Switch 780 780 780 Remote Extension Dial Lock off 782 782 782 Remote Extension Dial Lock on 783 783 783 NDSS Monitor Release 784 784 784 Trunk Busy Out Clear 785 785 None Extension Feature Clear A 200 790 790 Extension Personal Identification Number 799 799 799 PIN set cancel Dial Information CTI None None None Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 16 None None None Quick Dialling None None None It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers This is used for the Automatic Rerouting of VolP Calls To Public Trunk feature Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature numbers which are available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers should be one digit 0 through 9 X or and must not conflict For default refer to the following table Feature Guide 427 2 3 System Data Control 428 Flexible Numbering Table available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature Default Call Waiting DND Override 1 or 2 Executive Busy Override 3 Message Waiting set 4 Call Monitor 5 Automatic Callback Busy CCBS 6 Alternate Calling Ring Voice x To use Call Waiting DND Override both
86. Call Log Button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming call distribution group The button light shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Red on There is unchecked information Off All information has been checked e If the answering destination is not the original extension eg Call Pickup or FWD No Answer the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination If a call is forwarded to several extensions before being answered the information is logged in the call logs for all the extensions it was forwarded to If a call is forwarded to an incoming call distribution group and is not answered the information is not logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group e Call Log for PS Calls If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives the information is logged in the call log for the PS a When the PS is out of range b When the PS is turned off c When the CS is busy e Display Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent the call information from being viewed at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Outgoing Call Feature Guide 1 18 Caller ID Features Log display the Personal Speed Dialling number display and the SVM Log display are also locked and the voice messages in the
87. Code gt A call is received through a TIE line as follows 1021 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Removed number of digits 1 Added number None Received number 1021 A Modified number 1021 1021 AA Remove the first 1 digit 1021 lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt A call is received through a TIE line as follows 0511033 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Removed number of digits 3 Added number 9 Received number 0511033 4 Modified number 0511033 9511033 l 1 Remove the first 3 digits 2 Add 9 Does the modified number have the own PBX code 951 Yes 9511033 Goes to CH is in the flowchart of Making a TIE Line Call from an Removes the own PBX code 951 1033 Extension Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX l Operator Call No Extension No Extension No Idle Line Others of the Own PBX of Other PBX Access No or Reorder tone Goes to A Trunk Group Reorder tone is in the flowchart of Access No Directs the call to the operator Does the corresponding extension exist Is the corresponding extension idle Sends reorder tone or sends the Calls the extension call Intercept Rou
88. Extension Line Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance default 699 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when a user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used ka be done If remote access is disabled through system programming then this on site programming cannot Feature Guide 413 2 3 System Data Control 414 2 Remote Programming Method Description Using a modem RMT card An RMT card must be installed The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned default 599 PC programming using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem can be done in the following ways e Direct Access Dial the DIL DID DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance e Through DISA Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature gt 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Call Transfer Call an extension probably the operator and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance 1 12 1 Call Transfer Using an external modem Not RMT card An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform the remote programming An external modem can be connected to the Serial Interface RS
89. External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 39 1 1 Slot OPB KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Device Type 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Doorphone Open Duration 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Door Open 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR Door Unlock PT Programming Manual 207 Door Unlock Time 512 Permission for Door Open Access Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 10 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected 196 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description When a call is received at the floating extension number assigned to the external pager a ring tone is sent through the pager Any extension user can then answer the call Conditions es Hardware Requirement A user supplied external pager es Floating Extension Number A floating extension number must be assigned for an external pager default 600 It is possible to access an external pager by dialling its floating extension number e Pager Volume It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming
90. Feature Guide 1 13 Holding Features and puts the call on hold the music source is selected based on the tenant setting to which the extension user belongs 2 2 3 Tenant Service MPR Software File Version 3 1000 e Regardless of the type of incoming call the music source for the tenant to which an extension user belongs is used Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM KX TDA30 only BGM and Music on Hold Music on Hold 2 8 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH MOH MOH 1 Music On Hold 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only MOH MOH 2 Music On Hold 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only MOH MOH Music On Hold KX TDA30 only PT Programming Manual 710 Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 711 Music on Hold Feature Guide 183 1 14 Conference Features 1 14 Conference Features 1 14 1 Conference Features 1 14 1 1 Conference Features SUMMARY Description A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously The following features are available to esta
91. Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 8 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Feature Guide 129 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting Conditions e This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e Call Waiting tone can be selected Tone 1 or Tone 2 through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Caller D Visual Caller ID Display 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type PT Programming Manua
92. Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 4 Description Queuing Feature When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service This PBX supports a specified number of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences specific commands which are performed when a caller enters a queue The following commands can be assigned to each sequence when making a Queuing Time Table Command Table Command Description Condition OGM xx An outgoing message is sent to the After the OGM Music on Hold will be caller xx applies to the OGM sent and the next event in the sequence number will be activated bx5s Puts the caller in the waiting queue for If an OGM has not been sent to the b 01 16 x 5 seconds caller the caller hears a ringback tone If an OGM has been sent to the caller the caller hears Music on Hold Sequence c Redirects to sequence c c applies None to the sequence number Overflow Redirects to the overflow destination None Disconnect Disconnects the line None None Redirects to the next sequence If assigned as sequence 01 the Queuing No command Time
93. Log 2 Valid Input Input Display while Entering Description 0 9 0 9 Store the digits and PAUSE Pause P Store a pause by pressing the PAUSE button gt 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion FLASH RECALL F Store a flash recall signal EFA mode by pressing Hooking the FLASH RECALL button at the beginning of the number 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA INTERCOM Secret Conceal all or part of the number by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on SMDR TRANSFER Transfer T Store a transfer command by pressing the TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number used only for a One touch Dialling gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer Example Storing T 305 Transferring a call to extension 305 Secret Dialling Example When storing the number 9 123 456 7890 and concealing the telephone number 123 456 7890 Available only when in system personal programming mode Enter 9 gt INTERCOM gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 gt INTERCOM Notes e Itis possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number at the beginning of the Memory Dialling numbers e tis possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location Conditions e Trunk Acce
94. Manual 453 DID Destination 500 Trunk Group Number Feature Guide 355 1 30 Networking Features Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 356 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Description The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets VoIP and sent through this network VoIP networks support private network communications using TIE line service Example Extn 1000 jz Extn 1999 jE Dials 2999 Required Programming PBX For making a call ARS programming gt 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS or TIE line service programming For receiving a call Telephone Company ee TIE line service programming TIE Line Routing and Modification Table Private IP Network Router gt IP Gw Router PBX 3 IS Extn 2000 IS Extn 2999 Extn 3000 Extn 3999 Priority 1 Priority 2 z Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No
95. Method Main Call Waiting Distribution Miscellaneous Extension No Answer Redirection Time Miscellaneous Maximum No of Busy Extensions 2 9 12 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Options Longest Idle Distribution Optional SD Card Required 2 9 13 8 5 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Delayed Ring 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Wrap up Timer Feature Guide 53 1 2 Receiving Group Features 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 Wrap up Timer PT Programming Manual 621 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 632 Maximum Number of Agents 54 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Description Up to 4 outside parties or destinations at another PBX can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group using the following method A virtual PS is registered as a member of the ICD Group Then the telephone number of the outside destination is specified as the FWD AIl Calls destination Calls to the ICD Group will also ring at the outside destination as if that destination were an extension within the PBX This is useful in situations such as the following An extension user can have his PT and multiple cellular phones ri
96. Name Identification Presentation by QSIG 364 CNIR gt Calling Name Identification Restriction 365 Code Entry Verified 147 COLP by QSIG gt Connected Line Identification Presentation by QSIG 364 COLP gt Connected Line Identification Presentation 254 COLR gt Connected Line Identification Restriction 254 364 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 266 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG 370 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 385 Conference 184 185 191 Confirmation Tone 331 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 254 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP by QSIG 364 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 254 Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP by QSIG 364 CONP by QSIG gt Connected Name Identification Presentation by QSIG 364 CONR gt Connected Name Identification Restriction 365 Consultation Hold 164 173 181 COS gt Class of Service 394 CPC gt Calling Party Control Signal Detection 172 CT by ISDN gt Call Transfer by ISDN 263 CT by QSIG gt Call Transfer by QSIG 368 CTI gt Computer Telephony Integration 385 D Data Line Security 161 DDI gt Direct DiallingIn 22 Delayed Ringing 51 Denied Code Tables 133 iagnostics 433 ialTone 329 ial Tone Transfer 143 ial Type Selection 93 ialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 166 ialling One touch 109 ID gt Direc
97. No PBX Sa o 111222333 i FWD IRNA etc a _ Answering party 3 111222444 CLIP COLP No is displayed 111222444 2 Answers the call CLIP COLP Number The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP COLP can be assigned as follows e CLIP COLP number for each ISDN port subscriber s number es CLIP COLP number for each extension es CLIP COLP number for each incoming call distribution group Each extension can select either the CLIP COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used The CLIP COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number 254 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Conditions e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e CLIP COLP features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service e CLIR
98. None 332 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Description ATIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system PBX or telephone company By using TIE lines the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included Interface The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network Interface Network Type E amp M Analogue T1 TIE E amp MI Digital 64 kbps x 24 channels E1 Digital 64 kbps x 30 channels BRI PRI QSIG Digital ISDN 2B D 30B D 23B D VoIP Internet Protocol IP The available interfaces depend on the cards installed in the PBX 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property for TIE channel 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Trunk Property 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property Feature Guide 333 1 30 Networking Feature
99. PT displays and other displays are shown in English Other languages may be available depending on the country or area In this manual model number suffixes e g KX TDA100NE are omitted unless necessary All system programming can be performed through PC programming gt 2 3 1 PC Programming However only a subset can be performed through PT programming gt 2 3 2 PT Programming In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features programming references that include a three digit number such as 000 indicate that system programming can be performed through PT programming PC Programming The number within the brackets indicates the system menu number for the Maintenance Console 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial CO Line Access Number Telephone Number PT Programming The number within the brackets indicates the programming number that is entered when performing PT programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number For further details please refer to the PC Programming Manual and PT Programming Manual Feature Guide Feature Highlights Networking Features This PBX supports the following networking features TIE Line Service A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations gt 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Virtual Private Network VPN VPN is a ser
100. SDN button Digital proprietary telephone only Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type a Call Waiting Tone Tone from the handset or built in speaker b OHCA Voice from the built in speaker c Whisper OHCA Voice from the handset d Off No notification Notification Method Call Type DPT Other Telephone Intercom Call Call Waiting tone OHCA Call Waiting tone Off Whisper OHCA Off Trunk Call Call Waiting tone Off K Including a doorphone call call via an incoming call distribution group and a trunk call transferred from another extension This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling BSS Conditions Automatic Call Waiting Through system programming it is possible to select whether a call waiting tone is automatically sent to the extension when receiving trunk calls doorphone calls external sensor calls and hold recall calls Through system programming it is also possible to select whether extensions will receive Automatic Call Waiting from intercom calls Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group DPT DTMF is not available D
101. Software File Version 2 0XXX ccccccceeeeecessueeeseeeueeeeeees 451 3 4 4 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3 0XXX nascesse 453 3 4 5 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 23 2 455 3 4 6 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 1 Jun 457 3 4 7 KX TDA380 PSMPR Software File Version 2 ON 458 3 4 8 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 2XXX ccccccccceeeeceeseeeeeeeeeaueueeeeaueueeeeeunaaaeees 460 3 4 9 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 3 ON 462 3 4 10 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version A ON 464 Inte CC EEN 465 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 15 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description Incoming calls via a trunk public line are distributed to their destinations according to one of several distribution methods 1 Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned a networking type Public Private or VPN Virtual Private Network 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property for TIE channel 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Trunk Property 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL Trunk Property
102. System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Option 6 ISDN Bearer 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 ISDN Bearer 2 12 8 6 7 Dialling Plan Auto Assign PT Programming Manual 420 BRI Network Type 424 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 425 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 426 BRI Configuration 427 BRI TEI Mode Feature Guide References 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features Feature Guide 253 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Description Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered CLIP Example 1 Dials 2 12345678 87654321 is displayed PBX N J j Caller Called party CLIP COLP No 12345678 CLIP COLP No 87654321 COLP Example 1 Dials Called party 111222333 A l 2 CLIP COLP
103. T7633 or KX T7636 DPT equipped with USB module KX T7601 through USB ports By using the KX TDA0350 PC Phone or KX TDA0300 PC Console CTI application users can enjoy many of the KX TDA series PBX features while utilising the benefits of a CTI solution PC Console gives users access to certain administrative level features that are not available with PC Phone The extensions that use PC Console must be assigned through system programming Along with many KX TDA PBX features PC Phone and PC Console offer many specific features including the following Phone Book A list of telephone numbers including detailed information pertaining to each entry This feature allows the user to make calls and send e mails to each entry Outlook Integration The Microsoft Outlook Address Book can be integrated to be used with the PC Phone or PC Console Pop up Screen An image containing information about the caller appears when a call is received Voice Memo Conversations are recorded at any time and can be saved sent by e mail etc Text Memo A user can type a short message during a conversation which can be saved sent by e mail etc For PC Phone Only TAM Telephone Answering Machine If a call is not answered within a preprogrammed time callers can leave a message after hearing a greeting message Message TAM messages are played back and or automatically transferred by phone or by e mail For PC Console Only Incoming Gro
104. TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX the removed number of digits from and or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX Feature Guide 351 1 30 Networking Features 4 TIE Line Routing Flowchart Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension A TIE line call is made as follows PBX Code Method 7 abc xxxx Extension No Method dexx Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no or an other PBX extension no in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Not treated as a TIE line call Yes TIE line access no 7 Other PBX extension no de D Is the leading number abc or de found in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX No Reorder tone Selects the corresponding trunk group and the dialled number is modified if a removed number of digits and or added number is assigned Is the trunk group available Reorder tone Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group Busy tone Yes Routes to other PBX or trunk 352 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Receiving a Call through a TIE Line lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX
105. Table will not be activated Programming Example of Queuing Time Table Queuing Time Sequence Table No Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 01 OGM 01 6x5s OGM 03 Overflow 02 2 OGM 02 6x5s OGM 04 None 03 i 2 9 11 8 5 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table Queuing Sequence Sequence 01 16 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 2 Ifa call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed the call will be disconnected Feature Guide 57 1 2 Receiving Group Features Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01 The call queues Queuing Time Table 01 Conditions Sequence 01 OGM 01 is sent Thank you for calling Panasonic The department you are calling is busy Please hold the line We will answer your call shortly Sequence 02 is sent for 30 seconds Sequence 03 Music on Hold OGM 03 is sent p Redirects to destination We are sorry to keep you holding The department is still busy We are transferring you to the operator Sequence 04 Overflow answers the overflow destination The call is connected to the member extension as soon as the extension becomes available e Ifthe call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing T
106. Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Table for Level 6 Level 7 Not Programmable Not Programmable 1 2 13 1 7 1 Denied Code Denied Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 301 TRS Barring Denied Code 2 2 13 2 7 2 Exception Code Exception Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 302 TRS Barring Exception Code Usage Example Using this method certain outgoing trunk calls e g international cellular phone long distance can be restricted as in the example below Restricted Allowed Level 1 No restriction e international Calls e Countries where Clients are Located noe e Cellular Phone Calls oss e Long Distance Calls e Local Calls e international Calls e Boss s Cellular Phone Leela e Cellular Phone Calls e Long Distance Calls Secretary e Local Calls e international Calls e Local Calls Lovela e Cellular Phone Calls Operator e Long Distance Calls In this example a level 1 user can make any trunk calls A level 2 user can make international calls to the countries where clients are located and can also make cellular phone long distance local calls A level 3 user cannot make international cellular phone calls apart from to the boss s cellular phone but can make long distance local cal
107. Time Service Holiday 24 Verification Code 4 digits 1000 entries Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 10 digits 1000 entries 440 Feature Guide 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Dialling Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA600 KX TDA200 Emergency Call 32 digits 10 entries Hot Line 32 digits Key Pad Protocol Dial ISDN 32 digits Service Access Personal Speed Dialling Without EMEC or MEC 32 digits 10 entries extn With EMEC or MEC 32 digits 100 entries extn Suis Dialling 4 digits 80 entries an 4 digits 80 entries an additional 4000 8 digit EE entries w EMEC or MEC card entries w MEC card Redial 32 digits System Speed Dialling Without MEC 32 digits 1000 entries Without EMEC or MEC 32 digits 1000 entries With MEC Additional With EMEC or MEC Additional 1000 32 digit 1000 32 digit entries entries tenant Groups KX TDA100 Item KX TDA30 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Broadcasting Group 8 82 members group Call Pickup Group 64 96 Idle Extension Hunting Group 64 16 extensions group 128 16 extensions group Incoming Call Distribution Group 128 32 extensions group 128 128 extensions group Paging Group 32 96 PS Ring Group 32 Trunk Group 64 96 VM DPT Group 1 group x 4 ports 8 2 groups x 12 ports 24 8 groups x 12 ports 24 channels channels channels
108. VPS VPS Extn The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller Sorry The extension is busy Would you like to leave a message Conditions Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Timing Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Timing DTMF Length for VM It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group Mailbox Access ID 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No The Inter digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable
109. a call the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension if the called extension is not able to answer calls 1 VM Group Type Type Description VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features A maximum of 2 for KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 8 for KX TDA600 groups can be assigned VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features With the KX TDA30 e One VM DPT group can be assigned e A maximum of 2 ports eight channels of the VPS can form a group With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 e Amaximum of 2 for KX TDA100 200 or 8 for KX TDA600 KX TVS KX TVP systems can be connected to the PBX e A maximum of one VM DPT group per KX TVS KX TVP can be assigned e Amaximum of 12 ports 24 channels of the VPS can form each group Example EE EE a Ee EE ee Se ee EE VM DPT Group Floating extn no 500 default VM DTMF Group Floating extn no 250 DPT Port Port SLT DPT Port DPT Port Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 DPT DPT Port Port SLT SLT SLT SLT l l i Extn 117 Extn 118 Extn 119 Extn 120 l l Port Port Port Port 1
110. a private network The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method The following features are available for an ISDN QSIG or VoIP private network For ISDN system programming is required to specify whether each feature excluding Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP is available for each port of the private network Service Table Service Description amp Reference Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Sends the caller s number to the QSIG network when making a call 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Prevents the caller s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COL
111. and confirm that the desired mailbox has been reached before going on hook to complete the transfer Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings 2 9 17 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode LCS Answer Mode 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Extension No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 2 11 1 5 1 Doorphone VM Trunk Group Number 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL Tenant Numbe
112. applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as exception codes TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling If the call is made using System Speed Dialling the call can override the TRS Barring Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for System Speed Dialling Once this feature is set it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling Any extension which sets Extension Dial Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 300 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide 133 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features TRS Barring Level The TRS Barring level is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables As shown in the table below the Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables 2 Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3
113. assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group This provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension 1 25 6 Virtual PS Feature Guide 217 1 17 Optional Device Features 218 Conditions General Hardware Requirement An SVM card The maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be recorded for an extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming Default 10 It is not possible to back up the SVM Log recorded voice messages or greeting messages If the PBX is initialised all this information is cleared When the card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming all the recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the Hospitality feature gt 1 27 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY However greeting messages will not be cleared An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension s message box If an extension user tries to access a card that two users are already accessing the user will hear a busy tone If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is already in use the extension user will hear a notification tone Voice message recording will stop when a acaller ha
114. but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting or the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing When a destination cannot be found the calling extension will hear the DND tone while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone Conditions DND for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The DND feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user DSS button in DND Mode The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS Paging DND It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming gt 1 15 1 Paging Intercept Routing Busy DND If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature Idle Extension Hunting While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension that has DND set will be skipped The call will go to the next extension in the group not the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination If 1 a trunk call via the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card arrives at an extension in DND mode and 2 the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination is not available and 3 there is no available exten
115. channel will be released immediately Since the PS can only be set to In Range at a single PBX at one time any other PBXs to which the call is transferred will refuse the call releasing the VoIP or ISDN channels mmm K Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version e If no signal is received from a PS for the preprogrammed length of time when an incoming call is received the communication status of the PS is set to Out of Range if enabled through system programming Feature Guide 381 1 30 Networking Features e When a PS comes within range of a certain PBX Out of Range status is automatically released However in some negative wireless network conditions Out of Range status may not be released automatically In this case the PS user can manually release Out of Range status by pressing the TALK button and confirming that a dial tone can be heard from the PBX e Ifthe status of a PS is set to Out of Range at all PBXs that it is registered to the call will be redirected to the overflow destination of the ICD Group e Handover from one PBX to another PBX during a conversation is not possible Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wireless Out of Range Registra
116. code is not required to call outside destinations in a certain area but received Caller ID numbers from that area contain an area code it is possible to store that area code in a modification table so that it is deleted automatically from received numbers Automatic Caller ID Number Modification 1 Features Caller ID includes the following features Feature Description amp Reference Caller ID Caller s information which is sent from an analogue trunk The following Caller ID signalling types are supported FSK and DTMF Calling Line Identification Caller s information which is sent from an ISDN line Presentation CLIP gt 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Automatic Number Caller s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 line Identification ANI 1 22 1 E1 Line Service 1 23 1 T1 Line Service 2 Service Features Features Description amp Reference Calling Line Identification Directs a DIL DID DDI MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller s CLI Distribution identification Caller ID CLIP ANI has been assigned to the Caller ID Table gt 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Incoming Call Log Caller s information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension This information is used for confirming the caller calling the caller back and or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Diallin
117. displayed on telephones or wireless phones connected to SLT ports Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 10 1 1 Slot LCO Card Property Caller D Caller ID Signalling 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Waiting Mode Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Call Waiting Mode Automatic Call Waiting 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 5 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 8 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR User Manual References 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 1 8 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 44 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extens
118. distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant Example Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3 Operator Call An extension user can call an operator by dialling the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number The destination of the Operator Call depends on the following Ifthe Tenant Service is not in use The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode Ifthe Tenant Service is in use The call is directed to the extension s tenant operator If a tenant operator is not assigned the call is directed to the PBX operator In this case the current time mode of the extension s tenant is used to determine the PBX operator that the call is directed to If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is assigned the caller will hear a reorder tone Conditions e A single extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the PBX operator e Tenant operators can be assigned individually for multiple tenants Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant Operator Extension Number PT Programming Manual 006 Operator Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources
119. e interrupt Redial When an outside party or seized trunk is busy a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing the REDIAL button without going on hook This can be performed several times without having to go on hook e Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button Pressing the REDIAL button on a display PT while on hook can display the Outgoing Call Log System programming is required for this operation e If the Outgoing Call Log is used to redial an outside party or a number already stored in the Outgoing Call Log is manually redialled again the number will be stored in the call log multiple times However calls made using the REDIAL button are not stored in the Outgoing Call Log again e It is possible to change the number of records that can be stored at each extension through system programming Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Automatic Redial Repeat Counter Automatic Redial Repeat Interval Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Automatic Redial Analogue CO Mute Busy Detection Timer 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Redial 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Redial Automatic Redial when No Answer ISDN Redial Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Feature Guide 111 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Redial Call Log by Redial key 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension
120. each external sensor to distinguish between them Conditions e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An external sensor and DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An external sensor OPB card and EIO card e Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it e After a sensor has been activated the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the duration specified by a timer This timer can be set separately for each sensor e As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed any further alerts from the same sensor are ignored e The assigned sensor name and or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor call is received Feature Guide 221 1 17 Optional Device Features 222 e Ifthe destination of a sensor call has set FWD the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination However if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call eg an outside party the call will be received at the original destination gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD e The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is received Alternate Receiving Voice 1 5 3 Intercom Call Hands free Answerback 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Consultation Hold Call Hold 1 13 1 Call Hold Call Transfer 1 12 1 Call Transfer Executive Busy Overr
121. entries to the Quick Dialling table in addition to being registered as Other PBX Extension Numbers as shown below Programming Example Number to dial to call an extension at another PBX using VoIP network 7 TIE line access number 20 PBX Code 1011 extension number 358 Feature Guide Number to dial to call that extension using a public trunk 9 trunk access number 012 345 1011 Quick Dialling Table 1 30 Networking Features Quick Dialling No Destination No 720 9012345 If the call cannot be completed using the VoIP network and the dialled leading number is found in the Quick Dialling Table the call will be automatically rerouted to a trunk as specified by the corresponding destination number When a call is made using the VoIP network if the PBX does not receive a reply from the other PBX within about 4 seconds of making the call or an error is returned the call is rerouted to a public trunk as specified Conditions e Some QSIG services are available gt 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features e TRS Call Barring settings apply to calls rerouted to public trunks Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work MPR Software File Version 3 2000 or later PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Feature Guide 359
122. extension Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features Message Notification If anew voice message has been left in a message box and distinctive dial tones are enabled the user will hear dial tone 4 when going off hook If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously been listened to dial tone 2 is heard instead In addition if the user s telephone has a Message button or Message Ringer Lamp the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left Pressing the lit button while on hook shows the caller s information SVM Log When a caller leaves a voice message on an SVM card the following information is also recorded as available a Caller s Name b Caller s Telephone Number c Time recording started d Voice Message Status New is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to Old is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received and the type of telephone used Only users of a 6 line display PT can view all of the above information Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers When an extension user accesses his message box the most recent unplayed voice message is played first When one voice message finishes playing the next most recent voice message wil
123. hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 132 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Description TRS Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming It is applied when the user goes off hook a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for each time mode day lunch break night There are seven levels available Level 1 is the highest level and level 7 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialled number not including the Trunk Access number are not found in the table the call is made There are five Denied Code Tables one for each of Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Exception Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the
124. incoming caller is leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Voice Mail VM Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension Check in Used to switch the status of extensions from Check out to Check in Check out Used to switch the status of extensions from Check in to Check out CT Used to access CTI features Primary Directory Number PDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Feature Guide 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Secondary Directory Number Used to show the current status of another extension call the SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 extension and pick up or transfer calls to it KX TDA600 only 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension One touch Feature Setting Buttons Pressing these buttons while on hook changes the feature settings The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period Conditions e The Flexible button lights of the KX T7040 and KX T7240 DSS Consoles show only Off or Red On If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns the other light patterns also show only as Red On Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3
125. is in Priority Hunting distribution method gt Incoming call ry Extn 103 M Con IEN 104 105 Extn 106 Ready Not Ready Wrap up Ready Extn 102 Log out Conditions Answering a call After completing the call Ready Waiting for a call P The Wrap up time expires Making a report A ress the Wrap up button ot Ready Making a report temporary break Pi Press the Wrap up button e It is programmable whether the last remaining logged in extension can log out e Log in Log out Button A flexible button can be customised as the Log in Log out button with the following parameters Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on Off No parameter Used with an ICD Group button or with the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or with x All Floating extension number of a Used to log in to or out of the specified Log out Log in Status specified incoming call incoming call distribution group Status distribution group 64 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Light Pattern Red on Off Parameter Usage All Used to log in to or out of all incoming After Log out After Log in call distribution groups to which the Operation Operation extension user belongs e Han ICD Group button is assigned it also shows the log
126. l I I A A Dials 9 0 01 23 4567 Dials 9 101 Idle Li Idle Li Access No Telephone No Access No Host PBX Extn No Access Code of the Host PBX Note 0 should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group TRG 1 of the behind PBX 98 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features Conditions TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS SMDR The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is connected directly to the telephone company not a host PBX This is allowed when the long distance code e g O is assigned as the Host PBX Access code All local calls teg calls that do not require a 0 to be dialled first are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on SMDR because in this case this PBX recognises the teleph
127. method the relevant access code must be added before the extension number registered here NDSS Button Customisation Monitor PBX At any extension attached to a monitor PBX customise a flexible button as an NDSS button for an extension registered above Then go off hook press this button once and go on hook again This activates the monitoring function The monitored PBX will begin to transmit information about the status of that extension and the monitor PBX will begin to receive the information The button light will display the status of the extension connected to another PBX Removing or Editing a Registered Extension Monitor PBX To monitor a new extension when 250 extensions are already being monitored it is necessary to remove the registration of an existing extension The NDSS Monitor Release feature is used to stop monitoring a certain extension When this feature is performed at a monitor PBX e Ifno other PBXs are monitoring the selected extension the monitored PBX stops transmitting status information for that extension Feature Guide 373 1 30 Networking Features 374 e The monitor PBX stops receiving status information for the selected extension All NDSS buttons for that extension stop displaying status information However the related information is not deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table Therefore if an extension user at a monitor PBX subsequently goes off hook and presses the NDSS butt
128. of rooms remotely 1 27 2 Room Status Control Call Billing for Guest Room Charges for calls from guest rooms can be logged and output as a guest bill 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Remote Wake up Call An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a timed reminder for a room remotely 1 28 4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Hospitality feature data including check in check out and timed Application reminder times can be output to SMDR for use in a PC based hotel application 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guide 315 1 27 Hospitality Features 1 27 2 Room Status Control 316 Description A PT with a 6 line display designated as a hotel operator extension can be used to view and change the check in and check out status of guest rooms associated with extensions Any wired extension can be used as a room extension without special programming Flexible buttons on the hotel operator s extension can be set as Room Status Control buttons The two types of Room Status Control buttons are as follows e Check in Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check out to Check in Telephone charges are cleared and Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned off allowing calls to be made from the extension e Check out Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check in to Check out Room extension data such as Timed Reminder or La
129. on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions a There is no space in the Waiting queue b The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in Example of a There are five assistants in a shop When the answering agent number is 2 and the queuing call number is 0 If two of the assistants are talking on the phone the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed Conditions Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group e If the Overflow time expires and the overflow destination is unavailable a If the trunk call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card 1 If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message OGM was sent to it or the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature gt 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA The line is disconnected 2 In all other cases Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again b If the call arrives through another card Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again Busy on Busy e If atrunk call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card a busy tone will not be sent to the caller Programming Manual References PC P
130. only one message at a time The selected message is displayed at the extension while on hook Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Absent Message Set Cancel 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Absent Message 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Absent Message 2 12 5 6 5 Absent Message PT Programming Manual 008 Absent Message Feature Guide 1 19 Message Features Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 6 3 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 237 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 20 1 Fixed Buttons Description PTs DSS Consoles and Add on Key Modules are provided with the following feature Line Access buttons Depending on your device type some buttons may not be provided As for buttons on PSs please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS PT and Add on Key Module Button Usage T Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset EST volume and the display contrast Navigator Key and Jog Dial y can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display ZON Navigator Key Jog Dial Volume Key
131. or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features COLR Set Cancel CLIR Set Cancel 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Extension Name 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Number Extension Name PT Programming Manual 003 Extension Number 004 Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 8 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 8 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 8 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identificatio
132. os P Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 7 952 1011 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 2 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to the outside party 211 4567 through the trunk Feature Guide 345 1 30 Networking Features 2 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature Example Telephone Company area code 09 Telephone Company area code 01 Trunk Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 1 zx e em vm wm e e ee mm mm vm e e vm mm mm mi TIE Line Interface Outside Caller Outside Party 23 4567 number 9 01 23 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 4567 i ji Dials DISA phone Explanation 1 The outside caller dials the DISA phone number of PBX 1 Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the modified call to the outsid
133. port or Super Hybrid port The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX PBX is called the master DPT and the DPT connected Master Slave to the master DPT is called the slave DPT DPT DPT Like XDP mode each telephone can act as a Extn 101 Extn 201 completely different extension with its own extension number If a master DPT is connected to the PBX by a Super DPT DPT SLT Hybrid port not a DPT port a third telephone SLT can also be in parallel or XDP mode with the master PBX Dae Slave DPT DPT DPT Digital XDP connection allows the number of DPTs Extn 101 Extn 201 that the PBX supports to increase SLT Extn 101 in Parallel Mode or Extn 105 in XDP Mode 168 Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features Features Descriptions Connections Wireless XDP For this connection refer to 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Parallel Mode 2 srre na APT DPT SLT PS PBX Extn 101 1 pg Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 102 ee eee Conditions APT SLT If one telephone goes off hook while the other is on a call a three party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing background music BGM receiving a paging ann
134. pressing the PDN button like when answering a call with an S CO button In addition a secretary can transfer calls from an SDN button or other button e g S CO button to the boss s extension with a simple operation like when using a DSS button An extension can have several SDN buttons each registered to a different boss s extension However only one SDN button can be registered for a single boss at each extension An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons PDN buttons can simplify the use of an extension because both intercom and trunk calls can be made and received at a PDN button This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 Making Calls with an SDN Button 118 When Standard SDN Key mode is assigned to an SDN extension secretary through COS programming SDN extensions secretaries can make calls for PDN extensions bosses on the SDN button For example a boss can ask a secretary to make a call and put the call on hold after which the boss can retrieve the held call Through COS programming it is possible to allow an SDN extension to make calls using the COS of the PDN extension All other settings that are available when using the Walking COS feature are also applied gt 1 9 5 Walking COS SDN Direct Dial An SDN extension can call a PDN extension or transfer a call to a PDN extension using an SDN button In this case Only the PDN extension rings e other SDN extensions do not ring
135. reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make a trunk call This detects the start a called party goes off hook and end the called party goes on hook of an outgoing trunk call When a trunk call is received the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an outside caller goes on hook If Reverse Circuit Detection is disabled the total duration of the call is not accurately recognised by the PBX The duration of a call can be verified on SMDR using this feature gt 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only or for both outgoing and incoming trunk calls or for no trunk calls detection disabled through system programming Conditions e This feature is not available for the following ELCOT or LCOT cards KX TDA6181AL ELCOT16 KX TDA0181AL LCOT16 KX TDA0180AL LCOT8 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Reverse Detection PT Programming Manual 415 LCOT Reverse Circuit Feature Guide 95 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out 96 Description The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through analogue trunks preventing users from seizing trunks where a loop current is not detected When loop currents are not detected trunks are set to Busy Out status and become unable to make or receive calls A trunk in Busy Out status
136. telecom Time B 12 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom Time C 15 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom Time D 21 00 3 C telecom 2 B telecom Feature Guide 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Carrier Table Assignment A specified number of carriers can be programmed Assign the following items for each Carrier Table 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Carrier Name Assign the carrier name 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Carrier Name 850 ARS Carrier Name Removed Number of Digits Assign the number of digits to remove from the beginning of the user dialled number 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Removed Number of Digits 352 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access Carrier Access Code Assign the code to access the carrier 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Carrier Access Code 853 ARS Carrier Access Code Trunk Group Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDA600 351 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access Modify Command Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Modify Command Command Explanation Command Description Number Add the number C Add the Carrier Access code P Analogue Line Insert a pause ISDN T1 E1 Line Insert a pause and change to tone DTMF signal
137. telephone company 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Service Description amp Reference Call Forwarding CF by Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN ISDN service of the telephone company 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Puts one ISDN call on hold 1 21 1 6 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement are available gt 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Three party Conference Establishes a three party conference call using the ISDN service of 83PTY by ISDN the telephone company 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 83PTY by ISDN Malicious Call Identification An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a MCID malicious caller Information on the malicious call will be received later on 1 21 1 9 Malicious Call Identification MCID Completion of Calls to Busy VI an outside called party is busy an extension can receive callback Subscriber CCBS ringing when the called party becomes free 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS ISDN Centrex Service An extension user can have access to
138. the Extension Number Method are supported gt 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Mailboxes for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network must be set up manually An extension can receive Message Waiting notifications from multiple VPSs connected to PBXs in the network When multiple notifications of the number of unheard messages in an extension user s message box are sent from different VPSs the most recent notification will be displayed A flexible button cannot be customised as a Message Waiting button for another extension at a different PBX Whether or not Enhanced QSIG information is transmitted can be set in the TIE table When PBxs are connected by PRI23 cards the card must be set to ISDN Standard mode If set to T1 mode the card must be removed and reinstalled to allow the mode to be changed When the card is reinserted into the PBX it is possible to choose whether the card will be set to T1 mode or ISDN Standard mode The default is ISDN Standard Transfer to Mailbox It is possible to transfer calls to a mailbox of a VPS at another PBX by creating a flexible button containing the following T extension number of VPS at other PBX P 6 Then the extension user can transfer calls to a mailbox by pressing this key entering the mailbox number and going on hook Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 46 1 3 Option New Card Installation ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card KX TDA100 KX
139. the KX TDA30 Maintenance Console KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 3 3 RMT Card KX TDA0196 2 6 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA Maintenance Console KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card 2 3 3 RMT Card KX TDA0196 2 8 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA600 Maintenance Console Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 17 1 11 1 Main Remote Password System Password PC Programming User Level Password System Password PC Programming Administrator Level Password System Password PC Programming lInstaller Level PT Programming Manual 801 External Modem Control 810 Remote Programming 811 Modem Floating Extension Number 812 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Feature Guide 415 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 2 PT Programming 416 Description A PT user can perform the following programming a Personal Programming Customising the extension according to his needs b System Programming Customising the PBX according to organisational needs c Manager Programming Customising specified frequently changing items e g Charge Management and Remote Extension Dial Lock Conditions CO
140. the timer expires the call will be disconnected Door Open While engaged on a doorphone call the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in gt 1 17 2 Door Open A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port KX TDA30 only Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot make a call simultaneously If a visitor presses the doorphone button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear no tone Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot receive a call simultaneously If an extension user calls a doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear a busy tone Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card KX TDA3161 2 5 2 DPH2 Card KX TDA3162 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 2 DPH4 Card KX TDA0161 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 2 6 3 DPH2 Card KX TDA0162 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 2 DPH4 Card KX TDA0161 2 8 3 DPH2 Card KX TDA0162 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers A Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Doorphone Call Ring Duration Doorphone Call Duration 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Mai
141. user s message box cannot be played back An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number e Incoming Call Log Memory The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX The maximum number that can be logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system programming If the memory becomes full the new call record overwrites the oldest one e Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls If the original destination of a call is an incoming call distribution group and the call is not answered the information is logged in the call log for the group If it is answered the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension Through system programming it is possible to select which Incoming Call Logs record call information when a member of an incoming call distribution group answers a call to the group Only the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call Both the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call and that of the incoming call distribution group Programming Manual References PC Programming Manu
142. will be displayed on the corresponding SDN extensions For example if a PDN extension has two calls ringing an SDN extension will answer the call that arrived at the PDN extension last when pressing the SDN button Feature Guide 121 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features When a PDN extension is a member of an ICD group in Ring Distribution method and an incoming call arrives at the ICD group the incoming call status will not appear on the LEDs of the corresponding SDN extensions 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY If none of an extension s PDN buttons are idle DSS buttons of other extensions registered to the PDN extension will turn on red Ring Tone Pattern Through system programming each extension can set ring tone patterns for PDN buttons Ring tone patterns can be assigned separately for each SDN button Outgoing Line Preference When PDN is selected as the outgoing line preference outgoing calls will originate on the first available PDN button 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Incoming Line Preference Through system programming it is possible for only incoming calls arriving at PDN buttons to be answered simply by going off hook by selecting PDN as the incoming line preference 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming This prohibits calls that arrive on non PDN buttons e g an SDN button to be answered when going off hook Walking Exten
143. wired telephone and the PS will be cleared 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear es When acall arrives both the wired telephone and the PS ring However in the following cases only the extension from which the option was set will receive ringing Automatic Callback Busy 1 8 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Transfer Recall gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer Hold Recall 1 13 1 Call Hold and Call Park Recall gt 1 13 2 Call Park Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port DPT Type Type for DPT or S Hybrid port 2 7 45 1 2 Portable Station PS Registration and De registration 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Feature Guide 299 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Wireless XDP PT Programming Manual 515 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone Feature Guide References 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 8 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 300 Feature Guide 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 6 Virtual PS Description An extension number can be assigned for a portable station PS without registering the PS u
144. 0 KX TDA600 only PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 Power Failure Restart Description When turning the electricity back on the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the PBX will record the event System Restart in the error log Conditions e Inthe event of a power failure PBX memory is protected by a factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 1 8 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on and Call Park 1 13 2 Call Park Feature Guide 435 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Description When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension which is allowed to use this feature through system programming a maximum of two extensions per PBX turns on red Pressing the button will show the error number on the display If multiple errors occur the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed For details about the errors and their solutions refer to the Installation Manual Error Example ERR 100 10000 1 2 Explanation Number in the ar Item Description Example 1 Error Code Shows 3 digit error code 2 Sub Code Shows five digit sub code XY
145. 001 1001 1001 1001 1001 Ext No of the Virtual PS When extension 2001 is called from another extension or is the first destination of an incoming trunk call etc the call will ring at extension 600 external pager first and then ring at the intercept destination extension 1001 after the IRNA Timer expires Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode day lunch break night Available Intercept Destinations Intercept Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code S IS SIS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code 32 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Conditions General Intercept Routing DND on off Intercept Routing DND can be enabled or disabled system programming If disabled one of the following is activated depending on the type of line that a call arrives through a ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT Card The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone b Other Trunk Cards
146. 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options RS 232C PT Programming Manual Feature Guide 309 1 26 Administrative Information Features 310 800 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 802 SMDR Page Length 803 SMDR Skip Perforation 804 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 805 SMDR Incoming Call Printing Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features 1 26 2 Printing Message Description An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR Up to eight messages can be preprogrammed in the Printing Message table and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX A message can contain the symbol which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected at an extension Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages this feature can be used to record a variety of information which can be output on SMDR to for examp
147. 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Sends the caller s telephone number to the network when making a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Prevents the caller s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Subaddressing SUB You may add digits after the telephone number These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device User to user Signalling Type 1 UUS 1 Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1 Advice of Charge AOC The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the
148. 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 1 29 1 Dial Tone 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features es 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 461 3 4 Revision History 3 4 9 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 3 0xxx New Contents e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 25 6 Virtual PS e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks e 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail e 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 33 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Changed Contents e 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY ICD Group
149. 1 2 Conference that line is disconnected but the remaining parties stay connected e Ifa CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA and an extension or an outside party the line is disconnected Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing Incoming 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CPC Signal Detection DDI DID Outgoing Incoming for DDI DID channel CPC Signal Detection LCO GCO Ouitgoing Incoming for GCOT or LCOT channel 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port CPC Detection Time Out In 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port CPC Detection Time Out DID In DID PT Programming Manual 413 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 414 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming Feature Guide 1 12 Transferring Features 1 12 Transferring Features 1 12 1 Call Transfer Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party The following features are available Feature Transferring method With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party Transfer is completed without an announcement Without Announcement After dialling the destination while hearing a ringback tone the originator can replace the handset Call Transfer with Announcement is also know
150. 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback e 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling e 1 12 1 Call Transfer One touch Transfer Feature Guide 453 3 4 Revision History 454 1 14 1 2 Conference 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA End of Call Detection 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 2 3 2 PT Programming 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA0920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 1 30 1 TIE Line Service TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 5 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3 2XXX New Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting e 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Changed Contents e 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing e 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming e 1 5 3 Intercom Call e
151. 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e 1 9 5 Walking COS e 1 12 1 Call Transfer e 1 13 4 Music on Hold e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e 1 18 1 Caller ID e 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log e 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 20 3 LED Indication e 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 455 3 4 Revision History e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 456 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 6 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 1 1xxx New Contents e 1 16 Broadcasting Features e 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN e 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration DID Number Notification to the VPS Changed Contents e 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup e 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP e 1 15 1 Paging Paging Group e 1 20 3 LED Indication Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button e 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Handover e 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR CD Condition Code e 2 2 4 Time Service Features Using Time Service e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 457 3 4 Revision History 3 4 7 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Versio
152. 158 Headset Operation EE 159 Der LR ULIA AA 161 Flash Recall Terminate ssrdsn E EAR a AAN RE 162 External Feature Access FA 164 Trunk Call Limitation EE 166 Parallelled Telephone eege 168 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection ssssssessserssssrrreeeerrrsrenrnssrrrssrrrn rerne 172 Transferring Features ssnssseeb seue rsseskkuesbsers eseukgEeEeSASRGAEEREESNSNEERESSAAAEEAENESEENEESRESEREageg 173 e RENE 173 Holding PO ARUI ES EE 176 Call Hold EE 176 Call Eegiel 179 E ue eee eee eee renee ea eer een restrr rere ery rer err oem reer terete eee re 181 Musicon HONG DT 182 Conference Feat re S eege EesgekeeaegeE deeg genee dees 184 Feature Guide 11 12 1 14 1 1 14 1 1 1 14 1 2 1 14 1 3 1 15 1 15 1 1 16 1 16 1 1 17 1 17 1 1 17 2 1 17 3 1 17 4 1 17 5 1 17 6 1 17 7 1 17 8 1 17 9 1 17 10 1 18 1 18 1 1 18 2 1 19 1 19 1 1 19 2 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 2 1 20 3 1 20 4 1 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 1 1 21 1 2 1 21 1 3 1 21 1 4 1 21 1 5 1 21 1 6 1 21 1 7 1 21 1 8 1 21 1 9 1 21 1 10 1 21 1 11 1 21 1 12 1 22 1 22 1 1 23 1 23 1 1 24 1 24 1 1 24 2 1 24 3 1 25 Conference E 184 Conference Features GUMMAPNY s rssiori ie eanenr erae aee ea aa ra E aE Ea e anaa k erei a i aiid 184 GOMPE EMCO corio R TEE cones E ea er ee 185 Privacy ReloaSomenanann a a neti E ad eet a A E N 187 Paging Ke 188 PAGING EE 188 Broadcasting Features wiicstnssacinisssnasnsninncecasaasnsenset se cdscananthassndensntianenadanceutus
153. 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings gt Timing Inter digit Time Timing Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM DTMF group to achieve proper recording gt 1 11 5 Data Line Security Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group User Manual References 1 10 5 If a Voice Process
154. 232C of the PBX Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL DID DDI MSN destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the Serial Interface RS 232C port AT commands can be programmed beforehand through system programming to initialise the modem An AT command can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode Using an ISDN TA interface 64 kbps through an ISDN The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance must be assigned default 699 and dial the DIL DID DDI MSN number Trunk whose destination is the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when an user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used Conditions e Only one system programming session can be in progress at a time whether using a PC or a PT e Programmer Code and Password for System Programming To access system programming a programmer code and its password must be entered For more details see Section 2 3 3 Password Security in this Feature Guide Remote Programming Limitation It is possible to disable remote access through system programming Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 8 RMT Card KX TDA3196 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of
155. 2525 Hamburg Germany Trademarks e Microsoft Windows and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries e All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners Feature Guide 3 A The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version as indicated on the cover of this manual To confirm the software version of your PBX refer to How do confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards in the FAQ of the PC Programming Manual or 190 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference in the PT Programming Manual Some optional service cards PTs and features are not available in some areas In the same respect some optional service cards and features are available exclusively for the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or KX TDA600 Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information 3 2 Exclusive Features Table Product specifications are subject to change without notice In some cases additional information including updates to this and other manuals is included in the KX TDA Maintenance Console s Information Before Programming Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this information Throughout this manual
156. 3 EZ Extn 1011 To use this method it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 953 and extension number 1011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 3 Feature Guide 335 1 30 Networking Features 2 TIE Line and Trunk Connection To connect the TIE line with the trunk the following patterns are available 1 Trunk to TIE Access 2 TIE to Trunk Access 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access 2 1 Trunk to TIE Access It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX It is also possible to forward calls using a virtual PS Using this method trunk calls received at PBX 1 are forwarded directly to the extension at PBX 2 even when using the PBX Code method a Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment Example Telephone Company Trunk ep Line Network PBX 2 o rm e Interface Extn 2011 ai EO Outside Caller Dials 123 4567 Explanation An outside caller dials 123 4567 The call is sent to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE l
157. 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number default 6 two digit group number Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy the incoming calls can wait in a queue Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Miscellaneous Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with Diagram A through F in the table are described in the following diagram A B Cc D E F Group Floating Group Distribution GE of Queuing Hurry up Overflow Overflow Destination Tenant No Extn No Name Method Extensions Capacity Level Time Day Night No 1 601 Sales Ring 3 5 3 60 WoO a Ju 2 602 Engineering UCD Max 11 8 90 200 ju 200 5 3 1 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 2 623 Incoming Call Distribution Grou
158. 7710 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 2 Exclusive Features Table User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 110 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves recently dialled external telephone numbers to allow the same number to be dialled again easily Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial is performed in hands free mode and the called party is busy redialling will be automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times at preprogrammed intervals The Redial Call No answer Ring Duration time is programmable This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP PHONE button Outgoing Call Log Information on outgoing trunk calls is automatically logged at each extension Users of display PTs can view details of a preset number of recently dialled telephone numbers and easily call the same outside party again Conditions e f anew number is dialled when the Outgoing Call Log is full and or Automatic Redial contains a number the data of the oldest stored call will be deleted and the new number will be stored e If any dialling operations are performed or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial Automatic Redial is cancelled e Automatic Redial is not available for some countries areas when using an analogue trunk
159. 8 Cell Station CS software data Flash ROM on the CS Conditions e The software version of the EMPR or MPR can be confirmed through system programming Installation Manual References KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 1 MPR Card KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 3 1 1 Slot MPR Card Property Memory Version PT Programming Manual 190 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 4 1 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Power Failure Transfer Description When the power supply to the PBX fails specific SLTs and or ISDN terminal devices are automatically connected to specific trunks Power Failure Connections The PBX will switch from normal operation to the Power Failure Connections and all existing conversations will be disconnected Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure Conditions General Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure All other features do not work DC Power Source If the DC power is available from backup batteries even if the AC power fails the PBX will remain fully operational KX TDA600 The analogue trunk cards and extension cards as well as the number of PFT ports ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows Trunk Cards ELCOT16 4 PFT ports Extension Cards EMSLC16
160. A busy tone will be sent to the caller If the intercept destination cannot receive the call a Intercept Routing No Answer Intercept timer will restart at the original destination until the call is answered b Intercept Routing Busy DND The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear a busy tone Idle Extension Hunting If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing Busy DND If the extension is busy or in DND mode calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group Intercept Routing for intercom calls can be enabled or disabled on a system basis 2 16 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Intercept lIntercept Routing for Extension Call IRNA Timer The IRNA timer can be set on a system basis and an extension basis for each time mode day lunch break night 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night The Intercept Routing destination for each time mode will not apply for Intercept Routing Busy When the original destination is busy the call is redirected to the Intercept Routing Busy destination assigned through system programming If no destination is assigned the c
161. A6105 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Main Hotel Operator Extension 1 4 gt Bill Checkout Billing Billing for Guest Need MEC Card PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 317 1 27 Hospitality Features User Manual References 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 318 Feature Guide 1 27 Hospitality Features 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Description Separately from SMDR it is possible to output a record of calls along with charges eg telephone charges minibar etc which can be used in billing a guest Charge Items This feature provides three types of programmable charge items Charge Item 1 Charge Item 2 and Charge Item 3 which can be used for billing guests for various services e g telephone charges Each charge item can be customised in the following ways A name that appears on the call billing print out 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel A Charge Du Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Telephone Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Minibar Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Others A name that appears on the di
162. Access Code The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR e When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR e A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is connected directly to the telephone company not a host PBX This is allowed when the long distance code e g O is assigned as the Host PBX Access code All local calls teg calls that do not require a 0 to be dialled first are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on SMDR because in this case this PBX recognises the telephone company as the host PBX Therefore only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO A SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Charge Charge Options Currency 2 17 1 11
163. By doing so ring calling is switched to voice calling or vice versa at the called party The called party may deny voice calling PDN SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only It is not possible to temporarily change the called party s preset call receiving method when making a call using a Primary Directory Number PDN button or Secondary Directory Number SDN button gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number a user will hear one of the following Type Description Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice calling Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling Ring Voice 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Main Extension Name Option 4 Intercom Call by Voice 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Number Feature Guide 87 1 5 Making Call Features Extension Name PT Programming Manual 003 Extension Number 004 Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 2 6 Alternating the Cal
164. CT by ISDN A 263 Three party Conference SPTY by IDN 264 Malicious Call Identification MCID nenne en 265 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCRN 266 ISDN EXt MSiOM EE 267 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol ccccccccccsceeeseseeeesaeeeceneecscaneeeseaeeeseaeessceeesseeeesaeeeeeseeeesseeesaes 269 E1 Line Service FCAtureS i ccscccsececcecsecescessccscesscossectsecsscveacenssussenacensrsdzcuntesersanesnseseesinds 270 ETENE SENICE ee Ee 270 T1 Line Service TTC 272 TI LING Service x c22c552 ae ci 95 costal ved deel Gebietes A AA 272 Veit 274 Voice Mail VM COUP sssr aaia A AE EA RRE 274 Voice ERAN lee EE 277 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration sasiiicisicsesscedecnineteeerannvesstteeeniedavevesdiineenteeessaeeecnntennete 284 Portable Station PS Features 2 12 0 cccccccsssesecsesesncsestsnenasessseceeseanseessunscesesssusneecese 291 Feature Guide 1 25 1 Portable Station PS COnmmGCt om sivecscincsetieetinsenceireiidasteties aided ected ones 291 125 2 Ee PAU OUI ees 293 1253 PS TE 296 1 254 PS TE 297 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 298 EZ WR 301 1 26 Administrative Information Features ccccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseessesseesneeess 303 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR ssssssssessesssreersrresssrrrsserrnnrrrnnnrsrrrrsserrnnent 303 1 26 22 Printing MESSAGES E 311 1 26 3 Call Charge SOC es ogists doneias sasiies de sawhcisa due sdenenin tdveotneli Gnecad
165. Company e e e mmm E d WE jz Extn 1011 Extn 2011 211 4567 Outside Party Dials 9 211 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 340 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 211 4567 xa e e e e 4 TI Line Interface i TRG 2 gt mnm o P Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 9 211 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 Feature Guide 341 1 30 Networking Features 342 c Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it W
166. Conversation The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the preprogrammed limitation the line will be disconnected gt 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering Dial Digits e Itis possible to select through system programming whether the trunk is disconnected when the Inter digit time expires without the TRS Barring check being completed 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Mode when Dial Time out before TRS Check f no disconnection is chosen the TRS Barring check will also be performed after the Inter digit time expires If disconnection is chosen the line will be disconnected when the trunk Inter digit time expires This also prevents EFA from being used This setting applies to all trunks e ATRS Barring level can be changed by some features The priority of features when multiple features are used is as follows 1 Dial Tone Transfer 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer 2 Budget Management 1 9 2 Budget Management 3 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 4 Walking COS Verification Code Entry gt 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 5 Extension Dial Lock Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settin
167. D to a Mailbox of the VPS Yes Yes 3 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS Yes Yes 4 Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS No Yes 5 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS No Yes 6 Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Yes Yes Access 7 VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Yes Yes Notification for Incoming Call 8 Caller s Identification Notification to the VPS Yes Yes 9 DID Number Notification to the VPS Yes Yes 10 Status Notification to the VPS Yes Yes 11 Paging by the VPS No Yes 12 Live Call Screening LCS No Yes 13 Two way Recording into the VPS No Yes 14 VPS Data Control by the PBX No Yes 15 Remote FWD Setting by the VM No Yes 16 VM LCD No Yes 17 Message clear on Check Out No Yes 18 Voice message number display Yes Yes Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Trunk Call Answered by the VPS Transferred to Extension at Other PBX ia Outside Caller Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 2 Hello NZ Please enter j I Mailbox 101 extension number X Extn Mailbox 201 E Ji Mailbox 202 Extn Extn VPS 201 202 Explanation An outside call is answered by the AA service of the VPS The caller enters extension number 201 so the call is transferred over the private network to extension 201 If extension 201 does not answer mailbox 201 in the VPS will answer it and play the appropriate message Trunk Cal
168. DI MSN Selection 426 BRI Configuration Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 27 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 5 28 Description Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Directs an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination when the caller s identification number eg Caller ID matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table that is used as the Caller ID Table Each Caller ID number telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number can have its own destination CLI Feature Description amp Reference Caller ID Caller s number is sent from an analogue trunk 1 18 1 Caller ID Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Caller s number is sent from an ISDN line 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Automatic Number Identification ANI Caller s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line 1 22 1 E1 Line Service 1 23 1 T1 Line Service CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods a DIL b DID DDI c MSN Ringing Service Each trunk for DIL and the DID DDI MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service When the call has Caller ID information and the CLI is enabl
169. DTMF Command Listening Message VM DTMF Command Switching to AA VM DTMF Command Switching to VM Command Default Switching to VM 6 Switching to AA 8 Recording message H Listening message xH Note H Mailbox Number 3 VM Service a FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS b The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others FWD to the VPS Sequence Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command Recording message command H Default Recording message command 6 H Mailbox Nol H H Mailbox Nol AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the correspondin
170. Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set in the PBX as the forward destination of trunk calls the network is instructed by the PBX This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB and Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR are applied to this feature Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P gt i l CF Request to 01 23 4567 Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party 01 23 4567 AN 01 23 4567 Dials 01 45 6789 j Extn 1011 Extn 1011 Dials 01 45 6789 DDI No 01 45 6789 DDI No 01 45 6789 Forward Destination Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification e ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each
171. Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and Exclusive Call Hold Conditions Call Hold Limitation A PT user can hold one intercom call and or multiple trunk calls at a time An SLT user can hold either one intercom call or one trunk call at a time By using the Call Park feature PT and SLT users can hold multiple trunk calls and intercom calls simultaneously gt 1 13 2 Call Park Music on Hold Music if available is sent to the held party gt 1 13 4 Music on Hold Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold If the extension is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period the call is automatically disconnected This timer starts when Hold Recall activates Automatic Call Hold A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO ICD Group INTERCOM PDN button through system programming If this feature is not enabled the current call will be disconnected Example It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button this puts the current intercom call on the INTE
172. ISA Tone Detection Cyclic 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message PT Programming Manual 209 DISA Delayed Answer Time 210 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 211 DISA Intercept Time 475 DISA Silence Detection 476 DISA Continuous Signal Detection 477 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 604 Extension Intercept Destination 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name 732 DISA Security Mode Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting 212 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Description The PBX can distinguish between fax calls and other types of calls arriving on DISA lines and automatically transfer fax calls to preprogrammed destinations When a call arriv
173. ISDN port of the PBX e This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 260 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features ISDN FWD MSN Set Cancel Confirm 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR CF MSN PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD User Manual References 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 261 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 6 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN 262 Description An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature This can be a part of a Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN and Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN gt 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 8PTY by ISDN This feature allows an ISDN call to be held an
174. KIA RK Charge Meter Print Out Total amp All CO IK IKK KKK KKK IK IK KK IK KK IKK IKK KIKI IK IKK IK EEE RII ee ek Total Charge 00175 95 CO Line 001 00194 00 002 00073 00 003 00161 00 004 00033 00 IK IKK KKK KKK KKK IK KK IKK KI KKK IKK KIKI KIKI KIKI KIKI KK IK Charge Meter Print Out All Extensions E 775 00194 00 102 00073 00 776 00161 00 104 00194 00 105 00073 00 106 00161 00 107 00033 00 Note extension or verification code number Conditions General e Call Charge Reference by Call Charge Reference Button A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Call Charge Reference button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Charge Reference button Pay Tone Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only e Itis possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company Feature Guide 313 1 26 Administrative Information Features 314 e Itis possible to enable the PBX to send the flash recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation in on hook status to receive the call charge information Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 10 1 1 Slot LCO Card Property Pay Tone Pay Tone Frequency KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Pay Tone Sending Flash w
175. M card the caller hears the designated greeting message In addition to the normal greeting message an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Recording Example e Normal Greeting Message You have reached John am sorry cannot take your call right now Please leave a message e Greeting Message for lunch mode You have reached John am sorry am out for lunch right now Please leave a message If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode However if no greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode the normal greeting message will be played instead If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been recorded incoming calls will not be redirected to the SVM card in that time mode For example if a greeting message has only been recorded for night mode and no normal greeting message has been recorded incoming calls can only be redirected to an SVM card in night mode No incoming calls will be redirected to the SVM card in day lunch break mode Direct Recording An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension In this case the target extension will not ring It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an
176. MF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance calling or voice mail services To switch to DTMF mode wait for a preprogrammed time period Default five seconds after the trunk is connected or press x This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode e Itis possible to select the pulse rate for a trunk port that has been set to Pulse mode There are two pulse rates Low 10 pps and High 20 pps e Itis possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to a trunk port that has been set to DTMF mode Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Dialling Mode DTMF Width Pulse Speed 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Dial Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port CO Dial Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port Feature Guide 93 1 5 Making Call Features gt Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed PT Programming Manual 410 LCOT Dialling Mode 411 LCOT Pulse Rate 412 LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration 94 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Description A circuit in the PBX can detect the
177. N The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit O through 9 or 00 through 99 Example ISDN Port for Extn No 1234 a 1234 Up to eight terminals SE Sr can be connected to 3 aq Eis the port and receive PBX 1234 1234 1234 a Call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 13X MSN 131 139 EXTN P MP Up to eight terminals Pa can be connected to the port d LS i 130 131 132 139 KS All terminals receive a call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 14XX MSN EXTN P P P MP ISDN Port for EXTN P P P MP _ Gi Behind PBX 1400 1499 Each terminal receives a call ne emm Use the DDI MSN 1400 1401 gt 1499 feature of the behind PBX Idle Extension Hunting is available Conditions e Subaddressing Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly e Call Transfer PBX feature is available only for ISDN extensions in P MP configuration gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer Feature Guide 267 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features e ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features or idle extension hunting group 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting In this ca
178. None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 39 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 Description Incoming Call Indication Features Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows Type Feature Description amp Reference Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern Selection A telephone rings when receiving a call The ring tone patterns can be changed for each incoming call type 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Voice calling Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming 1 5 3 Intercom Call LED Light Emitting Diode LED Indication The light shows line conditions with a variety of light patterns 1 20 3 LED Indication Display Caller s Information Display Information The display shows the caller s information 1 20 4 Display Information Conversation External Pager Trunk Answer from Any The external pager sends a ring tone when receiving Station TAFAS a call 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Tone Voice during a Call Waiting A busy extension hears a tone or voice from the handset built in speaker indicating that another incoming call is waiting gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 40 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1
179. O Oo O O Oo Oo O O Pa O Oo ge O O Length 6 Skip O O Perforation O O o Q O O O O O O o Machine o O Perforation O Q O SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset If the PBX is reset during a conversation the call will not be recorded on SMDR The following calls are regarded as two separate calls for SMDR Calls before and after the flash recall EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation Trunk to trunk calls by Call Transfer FWD or DISA recording each as incoming call and outgoing call The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk calls When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires the PBX starts counting the call A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start 208 Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT If the reverse signal detection has been set 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit the PBX will start counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface RS 232C port a New Line Code Select the code fo
180. O8 Card KX TDA3166 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 5 ECHO16 Card KX TDA0166 KX TDA600 2 8 6 EECHO16 Card KX TDA6166 Feature Guide 185 1 14 Conference Features 186 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Unattended Conference Recall Start Timer Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Unattended Conference Disconnect Timer 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS Transfer to CO 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Echo Cancel Conference 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Feature Guide 1 14 Conference Features 1 14 1 3 Privacy Release Description By default all conversations which take place on trunks extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy Automatic Privacy Privacy Release allows a PT PS user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S CO button in order to establish a three party call System programming is required to enable or disable this f
181. Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table The Overflow time expires Manual Queue Redirection is performed Available Destination The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode day lunch break night gt 2 2 4 Time Service The destination can be assigned as follows depending on the above conditions For a and b 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Queuing Busy Destination Day Lunch Break Night 627 Destination When All Busy For c d and e 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow No Answer Time out amp Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no S S SIS IS ES IS SIS Feature Guide 61 1 2 Receiving Group Features Destination Availability Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Y 2 Busy on Busy The Busy
182. P and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP Sends the caller s name to the QSIG network when making a call 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Service Description amp Reference Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call gt 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Prevents the caller s name being presented to the called party by the caller gt 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Name Identification Restriction CONR Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party gt 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Forwards a call to the QSIG network 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Call Transfer CT by QSIG
183. PC Programming Manual The PC Programming titles and parameters described in the PC Programming Manual are noted for your reference PT Programming Manual The PT Programming titles described in the PT Programming Manual are noted for your reference Feature Guide References The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference User Manual References The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference Abbreviations There are many abbreviations used in this manual e g PT for proprietary telephone Please refer to the list in the next section for the meaning of each abbreviation About the other manuals Along with this Feature Guide the following manuals are available to help you install and use this PBX Feature Guide Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX PC Programming Manual Provides step by step instructions for performing system programming using a PC PT Programming Manual Provides step by step instructions for performing system programming using a PT User Manual Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs SLTs PSs or DSS Consoles e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries The KX TDA30E KX TDA30NE KX TDA30GR and KX TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the e Pan European Integrated Services Dig
184. Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Feature Guide KX TDA30 KX TDA100 more KX 1 DA200 KX TDA600 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4 0000 or later KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3 2000 or later KX TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3 1000 or later Introduction 2 About this Feature Guide This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX It explains what this PBX can do and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Call Handling Features Provides details about the call handling features Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Provides details about the system configuration and administration features Section 3 Appendix Provides tables listing capacity of system resources exclusive features for each PBX model tone and ring tone tables and the revision history of this Feature Guide Index Provides feature titles and important words to help you access the required information easily References Found in the Feature Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference Programming Manual References
185. Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Subscriber Number Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Subscriber Number 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Subscriber Number 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features COLR Set Cancel CLIR Set Cancel Switch CLIP of CO Line Extension 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller to SDN when Transfer CLIP of Held Party 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main CLIP on ICD Group Button 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Option 1 CLIP ID Option 3 CLIP on Extension CO Feature Guide 255 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 256 Option 3 CLIR Option 3 COLR 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 CLIP ID Option 3 CLIP on Extension CO Option 3 CLIR Option 3 COLR 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual 003 Extension Number 422 BRI Subscriber Number 606 CLIP COLP Number Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 8 4 Display
186. RCOM button on hold To return to the held call press the INTERCOM button Call Hold Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made 176 Feature Guide SLT Hold Mode 1 13 Holding Features It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through system programming Hold Held Transfer to to be Retrieved from Transfer to Trunk i SE Extension Another Extension Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch hookswitch hookswitch Mode 1 S Hold Feature No Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No Going on hook Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch hookswitch hookswitch Mode 2 Hold Feature No 2 af Default Hold Feature No Trunk Access No Extension No S Going on hook Going on hook Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch hookswitch hookswitch Hold Feature No Mode 3 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Extension No Hold Feature No S Going on hook Trunk Access No Going on hook Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the Flashing the hookswitch hookswitch hookswitch Hold Feature No Mode 4 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Hold Feature No i Hold Feature No Going on hook Trunk
187. Remote Analogue Remote Modem Floating Extension Number Remote ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number PT Programming Manual 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 700 External Pager Floating Extension Number 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name 811 Modem Floating Extension Number 812 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 3 1 PC Programming Feature Guide 431 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 8 Software Upgrading 432 Description It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following Data File Storage Area Main Processing EMPR MPR software data Operating system data area on either the EMPR card of the KX TDA600 the MPR card of the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or the Main Board of the KX TDA30 Default data of system programming for each country area Country area data area on the EMPR card MPR card or Main Board Language data for PT display Each language data area on the EMPR card MPR card or Main Board There are two types Type 1 PT display except for PT system programming gt 2 3 2 PT Programming 5 languages max Type 2 PT system programming data one language max LPR software on a slot card software data KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Flash ROM on the slot card e g BRI
188. Retrieve Deny Call 176 Hold Call 176 Hold Call HOLD by ISDN 262 Hold Consultation 164 173 181 Hold Exclusive Call 176 Hospitality Features 315 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 98 HotLine 117 Hotel Operator 316 Hunting Circular 45 Hunting Idle Extension 45 Hunting Priority 51 Hurry up Transfer gt Manual Queue Redirection 58 ICD Group gt Incoming Call Distribution Group Idle Extension Hunting 45 Idle Extension Hunting Group 45 397 Idle Line Access Local Access 103 Idle Line Preference 102 Incoming Call Distribution Group 47 397 Incoming Call Indication Features 40 Incoming Call Log 230 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 67 Incoming Trunk Call Features 16 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 249 Intercept Routing 30 Intercept Routing DISA Busy 204 Intercept Routing DISA DND 205 Intercept Routing DISA No Answer 205 Intercept Routing DISA No Dial 203 Intercept Routing Busy 30 Intercept Routing DND 30 Intercept Routing No Answer DNA 30 Intercept Routing No Destination 35 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 61 47 397 468 Feature Guide Intercom Call 87 Internal Call Block 38 Internal Call Features 36 Interrupt Redial 111 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 383 IRNA gt Intercept Routing No Answer 30 ISDN Centrex Service 251 ISDN Extension 267 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Prot
189. S Number Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 6 Manager Features 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 148 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 149 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Description ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart The numbers in the flowchart correspond to the Programming Procedures on the following pages A trunk call is made No Normal Trunk Access Is the ARS mode CO enabled Sends the telephone number to the user selected carrier Is the dialled number found in the Yes Leading Number Exception Table Is the dialled number found in the No Leading Number Table Checks the Routing Plan Table 4 to determine which carrier to use No Is the carrier found in the appropriate time block Is there an available trunk group Q Be
190. S programming determines what programming can be performed System programming and personal programming Personal programming only No programming The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS The extension s assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming During programming the PT is considered to be busy Only one system programmer or one manager programmer is allowed to perform system or manager programming at one time The maximum number of simultaneous programmers that each PBX supports is as follows one system programmer 63 personal programmers one manager programmer 63 personal programmers 64 personal programmers System Programming Password Level To access system programming a valid password must be entered For more details see Section 2 3 3 Password Security in this Feature Guide Personal Programming Data Default Set A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Programming Mode Level 2 17 1 11 1 Main Password System Password PT Programming Prog User Level System Password PT Programming Prog Administrator Level Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 PT Programming Manual 2 1 PT Program
191. SDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 188 Three Party 3PTY supplementary service e The availability of this feature depends on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation 264 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 9 Malicious Call Identification MCID Description An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up Information on the malicious call will be received later on Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification MCID supplementary service Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2
192. Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Listening message Listening message command XH H Mailbox command Nol 6 XH H Mailbox No Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features Example PBX Sent 6 ne 102 L Listening message command mailbox number Pressing the Switching to VM command MESSAGE button Extn 102 VPS In AA service mode Mailbox for Extn 102 4 AA Service If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones e g ringback tone Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings DTMF Status Signals and Conditions 28 Default Status Condition Command RBT ringback tone The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension 1 BT busy tone The called extension is busy 2 ROT reorder tone The dialled number is invalid 3 DND DND tone The called extension has set DND 1 3 1 3 Do Not 4 Disturb DND Answer The called extension has answered the call 5 FWD VM RBT FWD to The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the Voice Mail ringback tone PBX is calling another port of the VPS FWD VM BT FWD to The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all 7 Voice Mail busy tone p
193. Settings Intercept to Mailbox Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension 1 12 1 Call Transfer The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant AA service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number The Transfer Recall to Mailbox setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Transfer Recall to Mailbox 201 Transfer Recall Time Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Access If the VPS r
194. TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 2 2 VolP 0 port 02 3 2 0 Feature Guide 357 1 30 Networking Features Priority 1 Priority 2 Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits Explanation Calls to destinations with leading number 2 or 3 are automatically routed through the VoIP ports designated as trunk group 2 IP GW IP Gateway Circuit IP address assignment for the local PBX and other PBXs Programming Example Destination Leading No IP Address 2 200 45 11 35 3 199 176 64 1 Explanation Calls are routed to the IP address of each IP GW card based on the leading number dialled Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks When a VoIP call cannot be completed successfully the PBX can automatically attempt to make the call using a public trunk instead This provides a backup method of making calls in cases when IP network transmission cannot be completed successfully Example Telephone Company Telephone Company ee ee EE Extn 1000 J Private IP Network Extn 1011 012 345 1011 Dials 7 20 1011 PBX code 20 PBX code 30 The leading numbers of extensions accessed through the VoIP network are added as
195. This feature is also known as Station Password Lock e Remote Extension PIN Clear If an extension user forgets his PIN a manager can clear the PIN Then the extension user can assign a new PIN e Extension PIN Display It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming By default it is shown as dots Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension PIN Set Cancel 322 Feature Guide 1 28 Extension Controlling Features 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT LCD Password PIN Display 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN PT Programming Manual 005 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 323 1 28 Extension Conirolling Features 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Description Extension users can clear all the following features set on their own telephone at once Features After Setting Absent Message Off BGM Off FWD DND Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting Disable In Canada the default setting is Enable Call Waiting tone
196. Time 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Pause Time 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Pause Time 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Pause Time 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port Pause Time 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous During Conversation Pause Signal Time 2 12 4 6 4 Second Dial Tone PT Programming Manual 416 LCOT Pause Time Feature Guide 97 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX host PBX by connecting the extension ports of the host PBX to the trunk ports of this PBX behind PBX A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX to access the telephone company e g to make outside calls through the host PBX The Trunk access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access code and the subsequent digits 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Example Telephone Company d e d 1 a I Host PBX i Access Code 0 1 l l t Host PBX p PS i Outside Party 01 23 4567 I l 1 i l l MM Idle Line i IE A No 9 I i meas Extn 101 Extn 102 l TRG1 i Dials 0 01 23 4567 i Host PBX 1 Access Code EE
197. Time Table which determines the overflow destination Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night BGM and Music on Hold Music on Hold 2 8 5 2 4 Week Table 2 8 7 2 5 Holiday Table 2 8 13 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block 2 9 4 8 2 User Group 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Tenant Number 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Feature Guide 403 2 2 System Configuration Software 404 2 11 1 5 1 Doorphone Tenant Number 2 11 7 5 5 External Sensor Tenant No 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant 2 14 8 ARS 2 14 6 8 5 Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenant 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL Tenant Number 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Tenant Number 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table Main Tenant Number PT Programming Manual 001 System Speed Dialling Number 006 Operator Assignment 320 ARS Mode 711 Music on Hold Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 4 Time Service Description This PBX supports day night lunch and break modes of operation TRS Barring can be arranged separately The destination of incoming calls can be set diff
198. Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous PT Display PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 2 10 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible Button Data Copy 2 10 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Feature Guide 243 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 20 3 LED Indication 244 Description The LED Light Emitting Diode of the Message Ringer Lamp and following buttons Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button show line conditions with a variety of light patterns Line Status Buttons S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group PDN Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS SDN 1 Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp DPT e Incoming call from a trunk Red flashing e Incoming call from another extension Green flashing e Messages present no incoming call Red on e No message s present no incoming call Off e Incoming call Red flashing e Messages present no incoming call Red on e No message s present no incoming call Off 2 Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Button Exclusive Hold Incoming Call Intercom Line Distribution Light Pattern Trunk Status Sta
199. To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN QSIG port basis through system programming e An extension user can set only one CCBS The last setting is effective e The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 370 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 5 QSIG Enhanced Features 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Description When PBxs are networked using ISDN or IP GW cards it is possible to assign flexible buttons as Network Direct Station Selection NDSS buttons These buttons are used to monitor the status of extensions connected to up to seven other PBXs in the network and to make or transfer calls to those extensions with one touch like normal DSS buttons This allows operator functions to be centralised even when there are offices in remote locations NDSS buttons show the status o
200. User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 6 Manager Features Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension is allowed to use the specified features COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features oig Manager Feature Description amp Reference Password Manager Manager Password Changes the manager password Required Programming Change Call Charge Sets displays clears and prints the call Required Management charge data 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Verification Code Sets a verification code PIN for each Required Personal verification code Identification Number PIN Set 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Remote PIN Clear Clears the extension PIN of an extension Required remotely and a verification code PIN PIN Lock is also unlocked 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Remote Extension Sets or cancels the Extension Dial Lock on Required Dial Lock an extension remotely 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS Barring level of the Not required extension temporarily Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call e g international call 1 9 4 Dial Tone T
201. Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 143 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features User Manual References 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer 144 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 5 Walking COS Description A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number PIN 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN at another extension to make the following types of call using his Class of Service including TRS level overriding the other extension s Class of Service e Trunk call e TIE line call e Intercom call e External Relay Control gt 1 17 10 External Relay Control After performing Walking COS the following features are also available for the specified extension e Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND setting 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out e Absent Message setting gt 1 19 2 Absent Message e Extension Dial Lo
202. X 15 Remote FWD Setting by the VM Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS Conditions General e Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter Note that when a user transfers a call to the VPS with the VM Transfer button any caller ID information associated with the original call is not passed to the VPS e Extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 2 to 4 digits Live Call Screening LCS e Ifan SLT is connected in parallel to a PT and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off hook To intercept the call press Flash Recall button or flash the hookswitch gt 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone e LCS Button A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button e Extension Personal Identification Number PIN To prevent unauthorised monitoring it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN This PIN will be required when setting LCS 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the user forgets the PIN it can be cleared by an extension a
203. X TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 394 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Conditions e Walking COS Extension users can temporarily use their own COS at another extension with a less privileged COS to access features extensions or trunks that are normally inaccessible due to that extension s COS Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS PT Programming Manual 2 1 8 COS Programming 602 Class of Service Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Feature Guide 395 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 2 Group 396 Description This PBX supports various types of groups 1 Trunk Group Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups e g for each carrier trunk type etc Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings 402 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis Port basis ELCOT LCOT DID E amp M ISDN BRI ISDN PRI23 ISDN PRI30 Channel basis E1 T1 Extension User Group The PBX supports
204. YZZ X Shelf number 1 4 YY Slot number 00 11 ZZ Physical port number 01 16 Conditions e System Alarm Button A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button e ifan extension allowed to utilise this feature uses PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be displayed on the PC and can be sent to the preprogrammed destination via PC Console or PC Phone PC Console and PC Phone use e mail to send the information e The alarm information will be recorded on SMDR if enabled through system programming e The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday Installation Manual References KX TDA30 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log KX TDA100 KX TDA200 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log 436 Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics KX TDA600 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 5 7 Utility Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Error Log Maintenance Local Alarm Display Extension 1 Extension 2 Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Set Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Hour Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Minute PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 F
205. a DSS button is disabled 2 Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled 4 Flashing Light Patterns 1s Slow Flashing Moderate Flashing Son Rapid Flashing Conditions e The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority ICD Group S CO gt G CO L CO gt PDNINTERCOM e The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming call can be set to Off through system programming In this case the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual Feature Guide 245 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Fwd DND Fwd LED Option 1 PT Fwd DND DND LED Option 4 DSS Key DSS Key mode for Incoming Call PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 13 1 Call Hold 1 14 1 2 Conference 1 14 1 3 Privacy Release 246 Feature Guide 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 20 4 Display Information Description A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available Display Item Display Example Condition The extension number and name of the calling 123 Tom Smith or called extensi
206. a conversation e Verification Code Entry To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purposes a verification code is used This code can be used at any extension 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Account Code Entry 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR Account Code Mode PT Programming Manual 508 Account Code Mode Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 91 1 5 Making Call Features User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 92 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode rotary or tone can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming regardless of the originating extension under contract with the telephone company There are the following modes Mode Description DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk Pulse Dial Rotary The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk Conditions e Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DT
207. ach verification code Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming Itemised Billing S 5 3 Se 6 Location Code Name PIN cos Code for ARS Budget 0001 1111 Tom Smith 1234 1 2323 5000Euro 0002 2222 John White 9876543210 3 4545 3000Euro 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code Verification Code 120 Verification Code 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code User Name 121 Verification Code Name 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code Verification Code PIN 122 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code COS Number 123 Verification Code COS Number 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code lItemised Billing Code for ARS 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features User Remote Operation Walking COS Verification Code 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 ARS Itemised Code Option 3 Charge Limit 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 ARS Itemised Code Option 3 Charge Limit 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code PT Programming Manual 120 Verification Code 121 Verification Code Name 122 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 123 Verification Code CO
208. ack mode e Voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice c Sent when making a call to or from a doorphone Tone 3 2 Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve e Paging Answer e TAFAS Tone 4 1 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tone 4 2 Sent when moving from a three party call to a two party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tone 5 Sent when a call is placed on hold including Consultation Hold Conditions e Confirmation Tone Patterns All confirmation tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones e Itis possible to eliminate each tone Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual Feature Guide 331 1 29 Audible Tone Features 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Doorphone Called by Voice Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Confirmation Tone Tone 3 1 Start Talking after making call Confirmation Tone Tone 3 2 Start Talking after answering call Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Confirmation Tone Tone 5 Hold PT Programming Manual
209. ady and Ready modes System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error Time Service Used to switch the assigned time modes day lunch break or night Also used to check the current time mode status Answer Used to answer an incoming call Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Toll Restriction Call Barring Used to change the TRS Barring level of other extension users temporarily ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service ISDN Hold Used to transfer a call using the telephone company Headset Used to turn on off the headset mode while idle Used to switch between hands free mode and headset modes during a conversation Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual Switching mode Two way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension One touch Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one touch Live Call Screening LCS Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an
210. al e Hardware requirement A user supplied external pager e External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM gt 1 15 1 Paging 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM KX TDA30 only 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features External BGM On Off BGM Set Cancel 2 8 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH MOH MOH 1 Music On Hold 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only MOH MOH 2 Music On Hold 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 198 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features MOH MOH Music On Hold KX TDA30 only 2 11 2 5 2 External Pager PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 8 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM Feature Guide 199 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 200 Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension can record outgoing messages OGMs for the following features Feature Usage amp Referen
211. al 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Log Group FWD Supervisor Extension Number 2 9 12 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Incoming Call Display Option 6 Incoming Call Log Lock KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Option 7 Incoming Call Log Memory 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 5 Incoming Call Display Option 7 Incoming Call Log Memory 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 13 1 Using the Call Log Feature Guide 231 1 18 Caller ID Features 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 232 Feature Guide 1 19 Message Features 1 1 9 Message Features 1 19 1 Message Waiting Description An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages recorded by the Voice Processing System VPS or Built in Simplified Voice Message feature When a message is left on a PT the Message button lights or the Message Ringer Lamp turns on red and a message
212. al PSs with the lowest member numbers are available e ELCOT LCOT trunks without reverse circuit detection gt 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit and channels of a T1 trunk set to LCOT type do not support this feature e Calls to an ICD Group will ring at a virtual PS even if all of the other extensions assigned to the group are busy e Ifall members of an ICD Group are virtual PSs and trunk lines are available but the called parties are all busy neither the queuing or overflow features will operate Therefore it is recommended that at least one PT or SLT is also assigned to an ICD Group e To log in to or out of a group a virtual PS user can access the PBX through DISA enter the Walking COS feature number if required and access log in log out settings e Delayed ringing can be assigned for virtual PSs in the same way as for other extensions e The wrap up time feature is not available for virtual PSs e When forwarding calls to a public trunk system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the forward destination When calling using a private network the CLIP number of the calling party will always be sent Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller to SDN when ICD Group with Cellular Phone PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 25 6 Virtual PS 1 30 6 Network ICD Group Feature
213. al References 1 4 2 Holding a Call 178 Feature Guide 1 13 Holding Features 1 13 2 Call Park Description An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user Conditions e Automatic Call Park It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically es Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park the originator will hear a busy tone Retrying is possible while hearing the busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant zone e Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Call Park Recall will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call If the destination is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard e If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Default 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Call Park Button Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button It shows the current status of the preset parking zone as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking zone Off No parked call
214. all Announcement OHCA Using PC Phone or PC Console on a connected PC gt 1 32 2 PC Phone PC Console e The KX NT265 does not have a secondary Ethernet port Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 4 5 IP EXT4 Card KX TDA3470 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 5 8 IP EXT16 Card KX TDA0470 KX TDA600 Feature Guide 383 1 31 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 2 7 8 IP EXT16 Card KX TDA0470 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 36 1 1 Slot IP Extension Card Property 2 7 38 1 1 Slot IP Extension Port PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 384 Feature Guide 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Description Connecting a PC to a DPT or connecting a CTI Server to this PBX enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or the CTI Server The features that are available through CTI depend on the CTI application software used on connected PCs There are two types of CTI as follows 1 First Party Call Control 2 Third Party Call Control 1 First Party Call Control A PC is connected to a DPT using a USB port USB Module attached to the DPT The PC monitors the status of the DPT and controls the DPT PBX USB DPT PC 2 Third Party Call Control A CTI Server is conn
215. all Control or Third Party Call Control depends on your CTI application software For details refer to the manual for your CTI application software e Third Party Call Control cannot be performed when two or more CTI servers are connected to the PBX IP PT Call Control e APC connected directly to an IP PT cannot be used for First Party Call Control e IP PTs do not support the use of PC Phone or PC Console software on a connected PC Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 3 8 IP GW4 Card KX TDA3480 2 6 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 386 Feature Guide 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 6 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 2 7 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card 2 8 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 2 9 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 42 1 1 Slot CTI LINK Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Dial Information CTI 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 6 CTI PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 387 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 32 2 PC Phone PC Console 388 Description CTI First Party Call Control can be conducted by connecting a PC with a KX
216. all Forwarding CF by QSIG 00 cececcceceeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeenaeecaeeeeaeeesaeseaeseaeeseeeeseeseaeeeeeseaeesneeeeieeseeeteaes 366 1 30 4 4 Call Transfer CT by Ongerecht dese dee daneeiecees entre adil eines Aiea aie 368 1 30 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by OO 370 130 5 OSIG Enhanced FREE eegener EE ee EE 371 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection ND 371 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail 376 1 30 6 Network ICD GROUP EE 379 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 381 1 31 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features ccccccesssseeseeseeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseenes 383 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone PPI 383 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features ccccssseccsseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeee 385 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CT 385 132 2 PC Phone PC COnSOl EE 388 1 33 Cellular Phone Features nnnnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan nn 390 1 33 1 Cellular Phone Features GUMMAPY nenne 390 2 System Configuration and Administration Features 00 391 2 1 System Configuration Hardwat e cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeeeeeenseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeneees 392 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration cassie sn edex ce sicissgiectveed exneibins texesadus biaetea seine vad aptaetsadceencseieeanies 392 2 2 System ConfigurationN Software cccccssseesssseeeesssceeesssseeeseseeeeeseseneeeeesesaes
217. aller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message The caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension operator or any floating extensions eg modem for remote system administration an external pager for TAFAS e Calling an outside party via the PBX e Operating some PBX remote features e g FWD DISA Intercept Routing No Dial If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept after hearing the outgoing message OGM one of the following can be selected through system programming a Disable The call will be terminated b Operator The call will be redirected to the operator c AA 0 AA 9 The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA No Dial Intercept Timer 211 DISA Intercept Time 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 DISA Intercept Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service After listening to the outgoing message OGM the caller may dial a single digit DISA AA number The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message It is also possible to assign other DISA f
218. aller will hear a busy tone When a call arrives at an extension that is currently receiving a call the call will be redirected to the extension s Intercept Routing No Answer destination for each time mode The time modes that are selected for trunk calls arriving at extensions and VM groups are decided on a tenant basis Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow No Answer Time out amp Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings gt Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time Feature Guide 33 1 1 Incoming Call Features 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 DISA Intercept Intercept when all DISA ports are busy 2 16 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Intercept Intercept Routing DND Destination sets DND Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Intercept Intercept Routing for Extension Call PT Programming Manual 203 Intercept Time 604 Extension Intercept Dest
219. alling Type 1 UUS 1 250 V Verification Code Entry 147 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 147 VIP Call 60 Virtual Private Network VPN 360 VirtualPS 301 VM gt Voice Mail Features 274 Voice Mail VM Group 274 398 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 284 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 277 Voice Mail Features 274 Voice Mail Centralised 376 Voice Message Built in Simplified SVM 215 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 357 470 Feature Guide VoIP gt Voice over Internet Protocol Network 9357 VPN gt Virtual Private Network 360 VPS Data Control by the PBX 288 W WalkingCOS 145 Walking COS Through DISA 205 Walking COS DISA Automatic 205 Walking Extension 326 Walking Station gt Walking Extension 326 WhisperOHCA 132 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 298 Wrap up 64 X XDP Parallel Mode Wireless 298 XDP gt EXtra Device Port 9392 XDP Digital 168 Index Feature Guide 471 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 2005 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved PSQX3659UA KK0805BM4126
220. ample PBX DPT SLT DPT DPT DPT DPT SLT SLT SLT SLT Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group 6 PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls directed to the group Each group has a floating extension number and name through system programming One PS can belong to multiple groups VPS DPT Digital Integration VPS DTMF Integration gt 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 9 22 3 9 PS Ring Group 2 9 23 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 301 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 1 Name Sales 2 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 3 Group PT Programming Manual 402 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number 603 Extension User Group 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 399 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 3 Tenant Service Description This PBX can b
221. anation A DID call reaches a VM DPT group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature According to the DID Programming Example and VPS Programming Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS Time mode day lunch break night of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number 286 Feature Guide 10 11 12 13 1 24 Voice Mail Features Trunk Call Trunk Call 123 4567 123 2468 Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 1 Time mode Day PBX Intercept Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 2 Time mode Night Tenant 3 Company B d Extn 102 Tenant 1 Company A VPS Floating Extn No 500 a Caller s Identification Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call the PBX sends the caller s identification number name to the VPS DID Number Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call with a DDI DID number or an MSN the PBX sends the DDI DID number or MSN to the VPS The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by for example the Intercept Routing feature Status Notification to the VPS After the call is redirected by the VPS the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension e g busy to the VPS Paging by th
222. ardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored some may have default values Emergency numbers may be called even when in Account Code Forced mode gt 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry In any TRS Barring levels 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached 1 9 2 Budget Management In Extension Dial Lock 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock CLIP Number Notification KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only When dialling an emergency number the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a location identification number gt 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP The Ae number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP number assigned to an ISDN port to be used This feature is only available when using a PRI PRI23 line with E911 compatible services Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 13 4 7 4 Emergency Dial PT Programming Manual 304 Emergency Number Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the SMDR call record If for example a firm u
223. as a Supervisor Extension a One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group but it need not belong to the group b One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group Available Paired DSS Console This feature is available for the KX T7640 KX T7440 and KX T7441 Accumulation Value Clear Accumulation value data total incoming calls total overflowed calls lost calls average queuing time can be cleared manually The date and time of clearing is saved and is shown on the display monitoring starting date and time When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing will be shown If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed If the display is in idle status it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group it will not change Other Features while in Monitor Mode The supervisor can use other features on the extension making calls pressing the MESSAGE button etc even while in monitor mode When each operation is finished his telephone returns to the queue monitor display Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Incoming Call Queue Monitor 2 9 10 8 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Supervisor Extension Numbe
224. ata Line Security Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting 1 11 5 Data Line Security Call Waiting Tone A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if Tone 2 has been selected through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection If Tone 1 has been selected the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones Caller Information With the Call Waiting tone the caller s information flashes on the display for five seconds followed by a 10 second pause then flashes again for five seconds Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA For details consult your telephone company Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company over analogue lines the waiting Feature Guide 43 1 1 Incoming Call Features caller s telephone number can be received The number will flash on the display for five seconds followed by a 10 second pause then flash again for five seconds Note that the received caller information will not be
225. ated with SVM card 1 Voice Message extensions 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice 591 SVM KX TDA30 Message SVM SVM card 2 only 592 Analogue Remote Used to access the PC programming mode i 599 Maintenance through a modem on a PC ISDN Remote Used to access the PC programming mode 699 Maintenance through the ISDN interface on a PC Group Incoming Call Used to call an incoming call distribution group gt 6 two digit Distribution Group 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group St Se Features SUMMARY group PS Ring Group Used to call a PS ring group 1 25 2 PS Ring _ Group VM DPT Group Used to call a VM DPT group 500 VM DPT Group 1 VM DTMF Group Used to call a VM DTMF group Conditions e Itis possible to give names to floating extension numbers Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Extension 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Floating Extension Number Group Name 2 9 17 8 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Floating Extension No 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Floating Ext No 2 9 22 3 9 PS Ring Group Floating Extension Number 430 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 11 2 5 2 External Pager Page Number 1 Page Number 2 Floating Extension Number 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Floating Extension Number 2 17 1 11 1 Main Remote
226. ature facall waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature In the above cases the forwarding counter resets to zero and the call can be forwarded up to four times again from the destination extension described above CHE aa e Ls eee d d e Si Te pasi pa sit LE Original destination _ _ E FWD No Answer e Boss amp Secretary feature It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting FWD AIl Calls Incoming eee thnks call Ps ares ege ue E Be J Call or IS transfer a call em Doss Secretary Original FWD destination e Message Waiting While calls are forwarded Message Waiting information is not forwarded The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension gt 1 19 1 Message Waiting e idle Extension Hunting Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group 72 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features All Calls and Busy e If the forward destination is not available to answer a call this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call Doorphone call Trunk calls via the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT cards No Answer and Busy No
227. ble number is assigned to each DID DDI number DIL table can be programmed for each trunk and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each trunk lt DID DDI Table gt Location DID DDI No Tenant Time DID DDI Destination GEES Day Lunch Break Night 001 123 4567 1 105 100 VPS 105 100 VPS 002 123 2468 1 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS lt DIL Table gt Trunk No Tenant Time Table No DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night 01 1 101 100 VPS 101 100 VPS 02 2 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS Explanation If a trunk call with a DID number 123 4567 is received at 20 00 1 Tenant Time Table number 1 will be used 2 The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1 3 The call will be routed to the extension 100 VPS Holiday Mode The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode Up to 24 holidays start and end dates can be stored and one time mode can be selected for all holidays Time Service Button A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons a Day Night button b Day Night Lunch button c Day Night Break button d Day Night Lunch Break button Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes For example pressing the Day Night button switches between day and night modes All of these buttons show the current status as follows Light Pattern Status Off Day mo
228. ble Buttons Some special feature buttons eg WAVESEARCH button may be customised depending on the PS type Feature Guide 297 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 298 Description A PS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone PT SLT In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled the two telephones share one extension number main telephone s extension number as with XDP Parallel mode fora DPT and an SLT PBX Super Hybrid Port Cell Station XDP Parallel Mode Wireless XDP Parallel Mode lt L gt RE lt d amp a Gil DPT Wireless Phone PT SLT PS Extn 102 Extn 103 Conditions If one of the telephones goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the telephone going off hook However the call is not switched in one of the following conditions a During a Conference call gt 1 14 1 Conference Features b While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration c While receiving OHCA gt 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA d While being monitored by another extension 1 8 3 Call Monitor e During Consultation Hold f During a broadcasting call gt 1 16 1 Broadcasting Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS The wired telephone can accept o
229. ble to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept after the DISA Intercept time expires the call will be disconnected 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night DISA Disconnect Timer after Intercept 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 604 Extension Intercept Destination Walking COS Through DISA If the caller performs Walking COS extension number and PIN entry while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode 1 9 5 Walking COS After performing Walking COS the following features are available using the settings of the specified extension e Intercom call e TIE line call e Trunkcall e Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND setting gt 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out e Absent Message setting 1 19 2 Absent Message e Extension Dial Lock 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock e Time Service Switching Mode gt 2 2 4 Time Service DISA Automatic Walking COS Regist
230. blish a conference call Feature Description amp Reference Conference During a two party conversation an extension user can add other parties to establish a conference call with up to eight parties 1 14 1 2 Conference Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Privacy Release During a conversation with an outside party on the S CO button a PT PS user can allow another extension to join the conversation 1 14 1 3 Privacy Release Conditions e This PBX supports a maximum of 32 parties being engaged in simultaneous conference calls e g 4 eight party conferences 8 three party conferences 2 four party conferences 10 three party conferences 184 Feature Guide 1 14 Conference Features 1 14 1 2 Conference Description An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing two party conversation This PBX supports three party through eight party conference calls Conferences with more than four parties are only possible when a PT user originates the conference Unattended Conference The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue Establishing an Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference Unattended Conferences can only be established by PT users Conditio
231. button e 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Wrap up Timer e 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY e 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback e 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling e 1 12 1 Call Transfer One touch Transfer 462 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History e 1 14 1 2 Conference e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA End of Call Detection e 12041 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY es 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 2 3 2 PT Programming e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS es 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 463 3 4 Revision History 3 4 10 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4 0xxx New Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting e 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Changed Contents e 1 1
232. can be switched temporarily without clearing the FWD destination During setting the LED of the button shows the current trunk call FWD DND status The forwarding type and destination for trunk calls can also be set FWD DND for intercom calls The FWD DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the FWD destination During setting the LED of the button shows the current intercom call FWD DND status The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set FWD No Answer timer The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified This setting is applied to both intercom and trunk call forwarding FWD for Virtual PS If the extension is the first registered extension in an Incoming Call Distribution Group the extension user can set the FWD destination and forwarding status on off for up to 4 virtual PSs preregistered to the group 1 25 6 Virtual PS These settings are only available wnen FWD DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD DND Setting mode Conditions When FWD DND buttons are set to FWD DND Cycle Switch mode pressing the FWD DND button cycles the FWD DND setting In this mode when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls forwarding type forward destination DND on off a b c in idle mode the light patterns of the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button and the Grou
233. cannot be used for making calls as a TIE line as part of a trunk group or with the ARS feature and cannot receive trunk calls If a user tries to seize a trunk set to Busy Out status the user will hear a reorder tone This is useful if some or all trunks are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the external telecommunications environment Conditions e This feature is not available for the following LCOT cards KX TDA0181NE LCOT16 KX TDA0180NE LCOT8 KX TDA0183NE LCOT4 KX TDA3180NE and KX TDA3180AL LCOT4 KX TDA3183NE and KX TDA3183AL LCOT2 e Loop current detection is performed on active trunks whenever the trunk is seized and or at fixed intervals e When a trunk is in busy out status loop current detection is performed at fixed intervals returning the trunk to in service status once a loop current is detected An extension assigned as the manager can manually change the trunk back to in service status e Trunk status changes are recorded in the error log of the PBX e Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is reset Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Busy Out Status 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Busy Out Cancel 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Manager 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 5 Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO PT Programming Manual 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide Refe
234. cause all ves trunks are busy Modifies the dialled number by Yes i igi default removing the digits and Is normal following the modify commands Ee No Sends the modified number Sends a Sends a to the trunk busy tone reorder tone Sends the telephone number by the Idle Line Access 150 Feature Guide 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Programming Procedures 1 ARS Mode Assignment It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method or when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method gt 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 2 14 1 8 1 System Settings ARS Mode 820 ARS Mode Leading Number Exception Table Assignment Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature 2 14 7 8 6 Leading Number Exception 325 ARS Exception Number ARS Leading Number Exception Table Location Leading No No Exception 001 033555 06456 Leading Number Table Assignment Store the area codes and or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by the ARS feature In this table the Routing Plan refer to 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment is selected for each number The additional remain number of digits must be assigned only when for example is needed after a dialled number The is added after
235. ce Direct Inward System Access ___ When a call arrives on a DISA line the caller will hear a message DISA 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Queuing Feature If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution group any caller who is waiting in a queue will hear a message 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm the user will hear a message 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Conditions Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 The MSG card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 The OPB card and MSG card Number of Messages and Recording Time A maximum of 64 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 32 with the KX TDA30 messages can be recorded The total recording time in the PBX is eight minutes A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message OGM default 5 two digit OGM number One MSG card allows four with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or two with the KX TDA30 messages to play simultaneously The MSG card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously Example Up to 4 with the KX Up to 8 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 2 with the TDA600 or 4 with the KX TDA30 messages can KX TDA30 messages can be played simultaneously be played simultaneously
236. cess Description The following methods can be used to access a trunk Method Description Accessing method Idle Line Access Local Access Selects an idle trunk automatically from the assigned trunk groups Dial the Idle Line Access number or press a L CO button Trunk Group Access Selects an idle trunk from the corresponding trunk group Dial the Trunk Group Access number and a trunk group number or press a G CO button S CO Line Access Selects the desired trunk directly Dial the S CO Line Access number and the trunk number or press the S CO button Conditions e COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls e Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis es Button Assignment A flexible button can be customised as a G CO L CO or S CO button as follows Type Parameter Loop CO L CO programming are applied No parameter all assigned trunk groups through system Group CO G CO A specified trunk group Single CO S CO A specified trunk It is possible to assign the same trunk to the S CO button and to a G CO button the same trunk group to more than one G CO button more than one L CO button Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button in the following order S CO G CO L CO e Direct Trunk Access Pressing an idle CO button automatically switches on the hands fr
237. ch dial tone type has two frequencies e g dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B Type Description Tone 1A 1B A normal dial tone is heard when a No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set or b ARS is used Tone 2A 2B This tone is heard when e There are messages that have previously been listened to and no new messages on the SVM card e Any of the features below are set e Absent Message e BGM e FWD e Call Pickup Deny e Call Waiting e DND e Extension Dial Lock e Executive Busy Override Deny Hot Line e Timed Reminder Tone 3A 3B This tone is heard when e A called PS is being searched for e The recording time used by the Built in Simplified Voice Message feature reaches the limit e Any of the features below are performed e Account Code Entry e Consultation Hold e Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message e Answering a sensor call Tone 4A 4B This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded for the extension Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled Feature Guide 329 1 29 Audible Tone Features Conditions e Dial Tone Type A B It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4 If Type A is selected all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately If Type A is selected for the ARS dial tone 1A will be h
238. ck 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock e Time Service Changing the Time Mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service e CLIP number setting CLIP ID gt 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Conditions e When a trunk call is made using Walking COS the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied 2 2 1 Class of Service COS the budget of the specified extension is applied gt 1 9 2 Budget Management De ltemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator instead of the extension number of the actual extension used 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Walking COS is also available through DISA 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA es Extension PIN An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected e This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from calling by Internal Call Block 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features User Remote Operation Walking COS Verification Code 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class
239. coming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature Feature Description amp Reference Log in Log out Member extensions can join the group to handle calls Log in or leave the group for a break Log out They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Supervisory Incoming Call Queue The supervisor extension can monitor various Feature Monitor information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the Monitor and Remote __ log in log out status of the group members Control Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Conditions e One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups e ICD Group button An Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group It receives the incoming calls to the group One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups Multiple ICD Group If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow If the ICD Group button is not ass
240. coming trunk call as follows a DIL TIE the setting of each trunk port 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL Tenant Number VM Trunk Group b DID DDI the setting of each location number for DID DDI 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No c MSN the setting of each MSN gt 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table Main Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No Feature Guide 285 1 24 Voice Mail Features Example For DID Calls Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number message number and tenant number DID Programming Example Location DID No DID Destination GE VPS Trunk Tenant No Day Lunch Break Night Group No No 0001 123 4567 105 100 105 100 John White _ 0002 123 2468 102 100 102 z Tom Smith 2 3 e ae e e e 7 VPS Programming Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment A Trunk Group No Company Greeting No Incoming Call Service A Day 1 Custom Service 11 A Lunch 2 Custom Service 29 Break 3 Custom Service 31 Night 4 Custom Service 12 Day 5 Custom Service 21 2 Lunch 6 Custom Service 15 Break 7 Custom Service 42 Night 8 Custom Service 30 ge S W Expl
241. commend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e When a trunk call is made using Verification Code Entry the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied 2 2 1 Class of Service COS the budget of the specified extension is applied gt 1 9 2 Budget Management the Itemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator instead of the extension number of the actual extension used 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Verification Code Entry through DISA This feature is also available through DISA 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Verification Code PIN A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or through manager programming e Verification Code PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the PIN for the verification code will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared Feature Guide 147 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features e Budget Management for Verified Calls A limit can be assigned to the total of all call charges for e
242. cription Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations There are several different types of forwarding and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each type differ as follows Type Circumstance All Calls Any time Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk this feature can be set from the destination extension Busy When the extension user s line is busy No Answer When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Busy No Answer When the extension user s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls it is possible to set a different destination for each Intercom Calls Extension Forwards to to Extension Another Extension Trunk Calls to ae Ke eg Forwards to Extension Outside Party Available Forwarding Type All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercom Calls to Forwards to Incoming Call Distribution Group x Another Extension Trunk Calls to Forwards to Incoming Call Outside Party Distribution Group Available Forwarding Type All Calls 70 Feature Guide Available Destinations 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Conditio
243. d System Password 4 10 characters Enter the system password for installer gt 2 3 3 Password Security Operator amp Manager Extension Number Assign the PBX operator to all time modes day lunch break night gt 2 2 5 Operator Features The extension assigned as the PBX operators is automatically allowed to perform manager operation 2 2 6 Manager Features Flexible Numbering 1 Type 1 If Type 1 with x is selected X must prefix all Feature with feature numbers except access numbers when an 2 Type2 extension user wants to use a feature without Example Call Pickup feature number Type 1 with x x41 Type 2 without x 41 For default of the flexible numbers refer to the Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Extension KX TDA30 KX TDA100 Determines the number from which default extension KX TDA200 from 101 numbers begin from 201 KX TDA600 from 1001 from 2001 Operator 0 9 The feature number for Operator Call can be selected CO Access 0 1 9 The feature number for Idle Line Access can be selected Remote Maintenance Number Remote Maintenance Dial Number Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX including the country code When necessary this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes Note that the programmable i
244. d Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Feature Guide 29 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk and intercom calls There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows Feature Description Intercept Routing No Answer If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time IRNA period IRNA Timer the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Intercept Routing Busy If a called party is already handling a call new calls are handled as follows The call is redirected to the preprogrammed Intercept Routing Busy destination Ifan Intercept Routing Busy destination is not enabled the caller will hear a busy tone However if the call is made through an LCOT ELCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card the caller hears a ringback tone Intercept Routing DND If a called party is in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Intercept destinations can be assigned to extension ports 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 2 10 10 4 2 1 P
245. d a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 141 Call Hold HOLD supplementary service ISDN Hold Button A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company The TRS Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature gt 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features ISDN Hold 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature witho
246. d in system passwords refer to Section 1 1 2 Entering Characters in the PC Programming Manual Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 6 If asystem password is forgotten it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software If you do not have a backup of the system data you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it Therefore we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data For more information on how to back up the system data refer to the PC Programming Manual However as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file do not allow unauthorised access to these files Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 1 2 Access Levels 2 4 10 Tool Programmer Code Change 2 17 1 11 1 Main Password PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 419 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 4 Quick Setup Description It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a PC When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time with the Installer Level Programmer Code gt 2 3 1 PC Programming Quick Setup display will appear automatically The following items can be programmed as desired Item Parameter Description Date amp Time Year Month Date Hour Minute The date and time set on the PC will be use
247. d to detect the end of the call This function can be disabled through system programming If disabled DISA is released when the trunk to trunk connection is made The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk to trunk call via DISA Silence Detection 2 9 1 8 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main DISA Tone Detection Silence 475 DISA Silence Detection Continuous Signal Detection 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main DISA Tone Detection Continuous 476 DISA Continuous Signal Detection Cyclic Signal Detection 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main DISA Tone Detection Cyclic 477 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Limitation For a call between two outside parties even if end of call detection cannot be performed the call can be disconnected by a system timer 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation If the timer expires the line will be disconnected unless the originating caller extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number of times 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Counter DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Time 210 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time Automatic DISA Activation DISA can be set through system pr
248. de L2 Mode 425 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode TEI Assignment Mode BRI only The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network EI Mode 427 BRI TEI Mode Bearer Mode The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 ISDN Bearer 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 ISDN Bearer Automatic ISDN Configuration ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming 2 4 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port LI Active Mode Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 4 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 2 7 13 1 1 Slot BRI PRI Card Property 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port 2 7 15 1 1 Slot BRI Port Port Command 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 7 17 1 1 Slot PRI Port Port Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 2 8 17 2 9
249. de CLI is disabled Route to DID DDI destination extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature DID DDI service must be assigned as the distribution method for a trunk port e DID DDI Number Modification It is possible to modify a received DID DDI number which may be convenient when programming the DID DDI table The modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified DID DDI number 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 J Received DID DDI number 87654321 SW GEES 1 Remove the 2 Add 10 first 6 digits Feature Guide 23 1 1 Incoming Call Features es Inter digit Time When the Inter digit time expires the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number and starts to check the DID DDI table Refer to the Programming Example of DID DDI Table above Even if the Inter digit time does not expire the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number when the received number is found in the DID DDI table The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination If the received number matches several entries in the table the call is directed to the destination of the first matching entry Example If a call is received in Lunch mode Received Number Destination Explanation 123 4567 Extn 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving 7 So the call is routed to extensi
250. de Red on Night mode Green on Lunch mode Slow green flashing Break mode Feature Guide 407 2 2 System Configuration Software 408 Light Pattern Status Slow red flashing Holiday mode Note Any extension user except extension users allowed to change the mode can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button Conditions PT programming can set the Start and or End time of the following Day 1 Day Start time Lunch Lunch Start time Day 2 Lunch End time Night Night Start time PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day Break 1 Start Break 1 End Day restart Break 2 Start Break 2 End Day restart Break 3 Start Break 3 End Day restart Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Button A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 5 2 4 Week Table 2 8 7 2 5 Holiday Table 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Time Service Day Lunch Break Night Switch 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Time Service Switch 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Optional Parameter Ri
251. de the DISA Intercept feature operates The party on hold can use the Call Retry feature End of Call Detection does not operate after dialling Calls can only be transferred to extensions within the PBX Transfer Recall Call Splitting and Call Transfer with Announcement are not available e DISA Reorder Tone Duration It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time This specifies the length of time that a reorder tone will be sent to the caller When the timer expires the call will be disconnected Call Retry is possible during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Reorder Tone Duration e Call Deny Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Accept the Call from DISA e Verification Code PIN Lock Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively that extension or verification code will become locked and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter e DISA Automatic Walking COS The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card fo
252. depending on system programming If treated as intercom calls the call will be established immediately When transferring a call from an analogue trunk users are strongly recommended to perform a screened transfer so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands free Answerback when the extension user is absent Secret Monitor The beep tone that the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override Hands free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller Hands free Answerback with Headset The Hands free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Option 4 Transfer Automatic Answer for Transferred Call 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Automatic Answer for CO Call Forced Automatic Answer Feature Guide 83 1 4 Answering Features PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 5 3 Intercom Call User Manual References 1 3 2 Answering Ha
253. detected before the DISA Intercept Routing No Dial timer expires the call is redirected to the operator extension and fax detection ends Feature Guide 213 1 17 Optional Device Features Installation Manual References 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA3191 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Fax Extension KX TDA30 only PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 214 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Description Installing an optional Simplified Voice Message SVM card in the PBX allows the PBX to provide answering machine features This feature is only available for the KX TDAS3O Features for an extension user with a message box An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice message The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers Feature for a caller A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message Up to two SVM cards can be installed in the PBX Each card is assigned a floating extension number default 591 for SVM card 1 and 592 for SVM card 2 A card has two channels allowing two users to access a single card at the same time When an extension is assigned to an SVM card through
254. during or after conversation or to complete a Call Transfer It is possible to switch from headset mode to hands free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button Headset users cannot use the following features Automatic Redial gt 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Receiving OHCA gt 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Receiving Whisper OHCA gt 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port Headset OFF ON for DPT DPT S DPT S Hybrid or S Hybrid S DPT port 2 7 38 1 1 Slot IP Extension Port IP PT Registration and De registration Headset OFF ON 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 159 1 11 Conversation Features User Manual References 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 160 Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 5 Data Line Security Description Setting Data Line Security at an extension protects communications between the extension and the other party from being interrupted by signals such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override An extension that is using a connected data device e g a fax machine can set this
255. e he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use When all ports of the MSG card s become idle he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period After that the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA3191 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 5 6 Utility Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2 5 7 Utility Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2 8 4 2 3 Timers A Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features OGM Record Clear Playback 2 9 11 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table Queuing Sequence Sequence 01 16 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide 201 1 17 Optional Device Features Floating Extension Number Delayed Ring PT Programming Manual 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM 202 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Description An outside c
256. e incoming call distribution group the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups It is possible to return to log in mode manually The Automatic Log out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using the Ring distribution method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature es Log in Log out Information on SMDR Log in Log out information can be printed out on SMDR gt 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Log in Log out Not Ready Manual Wrap up Mode On Off Feature Guide 65 1 2 Receiving Group Features 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous No of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log out Last Extension Log out 2 9 12 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on 2 9 13 3 5 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Wrap up Timer 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Wrap up Timer 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log
257. e OTPBR E Interface eT TRG 2 gt of PBX 1 952 verification code entry feature no f i H 1 verification code verification code g H Be 1 4567 Yvy 1 J 1 E i k e mech z a Outside Party EE H ZER 211 4567 Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 1001 A Dials 7 952 9 Dials 7 952 verification code entry feature 211 4567 no verification code verification code H b PIN 9 211 4567 i Explanation Case 1 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and the telephone number 211 4567 2 The callis not connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because the COS of TRG 1 COS 3 is blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 Case 2 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 verification code entry feature number x verification code verification code personal identification number PIN Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and the telephone number 211 4567 If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX 2 the call is connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 344 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features d FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the Trunk Example Telephone Company oe Forwarded Transferred Intercepted to 211 4567 OTT
258. e Tables Level 2 Level 6 302 TRS Barring Exception Code Usage Example Using this method it is possible to restrict certain outgoing trunk calls e g international cellular phone long distance on a department basis as follows Restricted Allowed Level 1 No restriction e International Calls e Country where Factory is Located Level 2 e Cellular Phone Calls Engineering e Long Distance Calls e Local Calls e Cellular Phone Calls e Company Cellular Phone Level 3 e International Calls Overseas Sales e Long Distance Calls e Local Calls e International Calls e Cities where Clients are Located Long Distance Calls e Cellular Phone Calls e Local Calls Level 4 Accounting In this example a level 1 user can make any trunk calls A level 2 user can only make international calls to the country where the factory is located and can also make cellular phone long distance local calls A level 3 user can only make cellular phone calls to the company cellular phone and can also make any international long distance local calls A level 4 user cannot make any international calls or most long distance calls but can make long distance calls to cities where clients are located cellular phone calls and Feature Guide 137 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features local calls To set TRS Barring as in the example above it is necessary to programme the Denied Code and Exc
259. e VPS The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message 1 15 1 Paging Live Call Screening LCS APT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and if desired answer the call by pressing the LCS button When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox monitoring can be carried out in two ways each PT user can choose which through personal programming Live Call Screening Mode Set PS users cannot choose the way only Private mode is available for them Hands free mode The user can monitor the call automatically through the built in speaker Private mode The user will hear a warning tone To monitor the call the user goes off hook with the handset MONITOR button or SP PHONE button However PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Answer Mode Two way Recording into the VPS A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox while talking on the phone Feature Guide 287 1 24 Voice Mail Features The Two way Record button is used to record into one s own mailbox The Two way Transfer button is used to record into someone else s mailbox Note Before recording a Two way telephone conversation you should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded 14 VPS Data Control by the PBX The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PB
260. e and cannot be used for hands free conversations Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Answer Mode PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 2 Off hook Monitor Description A PT user can let others listen to the user s conversation through the built in speaker during a conversation using the handset Conditions e Capable Telephone KX T7400 series and KX T7500 series display PTs KX T7600 series telephones and IP PTs To enable this feature system programming is required If disabled hands free conversation is performed instead Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Off Hook Monitor for KX T74xx T75xx T76xx PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor Feature Guide 157 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 3 Mute Description During a conversation a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built in speaker or the handset receiver The user can hear the other party s voice during Mute but cannot be heard Conditio
261. e g hotel name 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Bill SMDR for External Hotel Application Header 1 3 The check in time The check out time If the guest has already been checked out the check out time will be shown If not the time that the bill was printed will be shown The extension number and name A list of all calls made and call charges using the same format as SMDR output Pattern B gt 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR The total charge for each charge item and tax including the preprogrammed tax rate The combined charges of all three charge items currency of the charge and tax The sheet number the number of times that the current guest s charge data has been printed out and then cleared A programmable footer e g the contact information of the hotel 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel A Charge Bill SMDR for External Hotel Application Footer 1 3 It is possible to select the language used on the guest bill 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel A Charge Bill SMDR for External Hotel Application Language for Bill SMDR Walking COS If guests are given extension personal identification numbers PINs it is possible for calls made from other extensions eg an extension in a hotel restaurant to be charged to the guest s room extension by using the Walking COS feature gt 1 9 5 Walking COS 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN Feature Guide 1 27 Hospi
262. e party 23 4567 according to its ARS programming 346 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features 3 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 3 1 To Make a TIE Line Call The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number There are two system programmes for the tables TIE Line Routing Table used to assign the leading numbers PBX code or extension number and trunk group hunt sequence 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Leading Number TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits Added Number used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Removed Number of Digits Added Number Trunk Group Programming Examples Your PBX is PBX 1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network To identify the trunk route as illustrated you should make the following tables a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Other PBX Extension Dial TIE Line Network ER Extn 4xxx 3 da Extn 3xxx b 2nd 3xxx If you dial TRG 2 Aa a 2xxx b 3xxx E E C 4xxx RE RS
263. e redirected to his message box on the SVM card when he cannot answer them The user can set the floating extension number of the SVM card as the destination for redirected calls Then the SVM card answers redirected calls plays back the relevant greeting message and records a voice message Incoming calls can be redirected to an SVM card by the following methods Call Forwarding FWD gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Intercept Routing No Answer Busy DND gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Programming Example for Intercept Routing Extension No Assigned SVM Card Intercept Destination me Day Lunch Break Night 101 1 102 591 591 591 102 1 103 591 591 591 301 Operator 2 z 591 In this example If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered a In day mode the call will be redirected to extension 102 b In lunch break night mode the call will be redirected to the SVM card and a voice message will be recorded to the message box If a call is received at extension 301 operator the call will only be redirected to the SVM card in night mode If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension the FWD setting has priority So for example it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls to an SVM card even during day mode Greeting Message for Each Time Mode When a call is redirected to the SV
264. e shared with a certain number of tenants 1 Tenant Configuration 1 1 Tenant Member The tenant members consist of extension user groups One extension user group can belong to only one tenant Therefore one extension can belong to only one tenant 2 2 2 Group 1 2 Time Service Each tenant has a Time Table The Start and or End time of each time mode day lunch break night can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively gt 2 2 4 Time Service Example Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 5 Extension Extension User Group 2 User Group 6 Extension User Group 3 Extension User Group 4 Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2 2 System Management Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant a Tenant Operator extension number floating extension number of incoming call distribution group none 2 2 5 Operator Features 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant Operator Extension Number b ARS Mode Off Local Access All Access System 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant ARS Mode c Music Source for Music on Hold System BGM Number Cyclic Tone 1 13 4 Music on Hold 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant Music On Hold d System Speed Dialling System Extended for KX TDA30 or System Tenant Exclusive for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 gt 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Per
265. eaeeseaeeseeeeeaeeseeseaeeeieeseaeeeeeees 51 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 55 Eleng Feature seiis eea Eet Ee Eege eege Eeer ee 57 VIP TEE 60 Overflow Feature AE 61 ee bla Be LEE 64 Supervisory FeatOtreezgsieiegrgech eiedreg E ct cece cesses arp a aa e ir e enep rer E aN an i a ec 67 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features cccccsssssssseeeeesseeeeeeeeees 69 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 69 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DOND SUMMARY A 69 Call Forwarding EWD A 70 Do Not Disturb DND ice Aether deg 74 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button 76 Answering A ET 79 Answenng NS 79 Answering Features GUMMAPY Ra 79 LING PreferemCO INCOMING EE 80 Gall PICKUP EE 81 elle EEN 83 Making Call Features eessen 85 os fete E Tite E 85 Automatic Extension Release iisiicises ccccicivndesaisked ansceasenadsawereniednavedeantiecenceremaeeativonenneeaaaueces 86 aen BEE 87 Tunk e 89 Trunk Call Features SUMMARPY AA 89 Emergency e 90 ACCOUNT Code un EE 91 Dial Type Selectii asc sinea anna a a aa a Eaa a E aaa Ea aa Ea EaR aaa aaa ana R aans 93 Peverse Circuit E T T E E E E E E E TET 95 TRUK AO E E he et A E E a T TT 96 PAUSE INsertioM oeaiei e kee a aea a A E a a a a ea a 97 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX e cesceeeeeseeeeeees 98 Feature Guide 1 5 4 9 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 2 1 5 5 3 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 1 6 1 2 1 6 1 3
266. eard If Type B is selected dial tone 1B will be heard e Distinctive dial tones can be disabled When disabled dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those marked with in the table above e Dial Tone Patterns All dial tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones e Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM DPT DTMF group 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for Extension Dial Tone Dial Tone for ARS PT Programming Manual None 330 Feature Guide 1 29 Audible Tone Features 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of feature operations the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users Type Description Tone 1 a Sent when the setting is accepted b Sent when a call is received in voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice The caller s voice will be heard after the tone Tone 2 a Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged b Sent when a call is received in Hands free Answerback mode Tone 3 1 a Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature b Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation e Hands free Answerb
267. eature Conditions e CO Button A flexible button can be customised as the S CO button e Privacy Release Time Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined e This feature overrides Data Line Security gt 1 11 5 Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Privacy Release by SCO key 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Feature Guide 187 1 15 Paging Features 1 15 Paging Features 1 15 1 Paging Description An extension user can make a voice announcement to many destinations simultaneously The message is announced over the built in speakers of PTs and or external speakers external pagers which belong to the paging group With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 up to two external pagers can be connected with the KX TDA30 one external pager can be connected The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging Deny An extension user can choose not to receive paging announce
268. eature to one extension Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set In other words the extension that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Automatic Callback Busy PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 124 Feature Guide 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Description Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user Conditions e COS programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy Override and set Executive Busy Override Deny e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security gt 1 11 5 Data Line Security has been set b While being monitored by another extension 1 8 3 Call Monitor c While receiving OHCA 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA
269. eatures Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one touch no PF Programmable Feature default Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status 240 Feature Guide 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs DSS Consoles Add on Key Modules and or PSs a Flexible CO buttons b Flexible Direct Station Selection DSS buttons c Programmable Feature PF buttons Button Usage Button Usage Single CO S CO Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls Group CO G CO Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button Loop CO L CO Used to access an idle trunk for making calls Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button Direct Station Selection DSS Used to access an extension with one touch Network Direct Station Used to access an extension at another PBX within the same network Selection NDSS One touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with one touch Incoming Call Distribution ICD Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making Group or receiving calls Message Used to leave a
270. eceived at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period No Answer time the call will be redirected to the next member extension If there is no idle group member the call queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available Conditions e Automatic Call Distribution ACD When a KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version is installed in the PBX and the distribution type is set to Uniform Call Distribution it is possible to select whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order UCD or to the extension that has been idle the longest ACD ACD does not work for ISDN extensions or PS Ring Groups e FWD DND Extension System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions which have the FWD or DND feature set If set to ring the FWD DND settings are ignored gt 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature gt 1 2 2 5 VIP Call and or Wrap up feature 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out To use the VIP Call feature and or Wrap up feature Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main Line Hunting Order 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Distribution
271. eceives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the Message button light and showing the number of messages waiting on the display of a 6 line display PT on the corresponding telephone as notification gt 1 19 1 Message Waiting Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM DPT extension port or the floating extension number of the VM DPT group from his extension he can listen to the messages stored in Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number Direct Mailbox Access It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call Multiple tenants can share a single VPS each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM DPT group the PBX sends the VPS trunk group number and time mode day lunch break night of the tenant 2 2 4 Time Service assigned for the call to the VPS Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message company greeting to the caller Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the in
272. ected to the PBX using 1 the USB port of the PBX or 2 the Ethernet port of the CTI LINK card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only or IP GW4 card KX TDA30 only as a CTI interface PCs monitor the status of the PBX and control the PBX via the CTI Server When a call is received the CTI Server can be used to decide call routing and to send information about the call to the destination extension user s PC So for example if the call is from a customer that customer s account information can be shown automatically on the screen of the PC at the same time as the call is received depending on the CTI software used In Third Party Call Control the PC does not control extensions directly Feature Guide 385 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features PBX CTI Server CT Interface LAN Conditions General e Capable telephone DPT KX T7600 series PT USB module IP PT e CTlapplication software must be installed on the connected PC In addition some features may require a KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version e Application Programming Interface API Protocol The following interfaces are required for First Party Call Control and Third Party Call Control Type API Protocol First Party Call Control e TAPI 2 1 Third Party Call Control e ECMA CSTA Phase 3 e TAPI 2 1 e The operating system of PC or CTI Server required for First Party C
273. ed automatically without any programming An APT connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically when the XDP mode has been disabled A DSS Console or a Panasonic VPS DPT Digital Integration can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode APT and SLT in Parallel Mode An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode Digital XDP A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension gt 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone gt 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected a paired extension must be assigned through system programming Only a PT can be a paired extension 392 Feature Guide 2 1 System Configuration Hardware Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Pair Extension PT Programming Manual 007 DSS Console Paired Telephone 600 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode Feature Guide 393 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Description Each extension must belong to a Class of Service COS By assigning certain extensions to a COS it is possible to control the behaviour and privileges of extension users allowing or denyi
274. ed for the time mode the call will be handled by the CLI method Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI Location SH System Speed Dialling System Speed SIS Telephone No CLI Destination 3 Name No 000 ABC Company 901234567890 200 001 4 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Name 002 System Speed Dialling Name 2 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial CO Line Access Number Telephone Number 001 System Speed Dialling Number 2 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial CLI Destination Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Explanation If the caller s number is 0123 456 7890 The Trunk Access number is disregarded 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 000 2 The call is routed to the CLI destination extension 200 Conditions e Automatic Caller ID Number Modification The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification gt 1 18 1 Caller ID Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table A Port Settings DIL CLI Ring for DIL Day Lunch Break Night 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table CLI Ring for MSN Day Lunch Break Night 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number CLI Destination PT Programming Manual 001 System Spee
275. ee operation mode and allows a user to use On hook Dialling The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset e Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access If multiple trunk groups are available the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming e Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group from lowest numbered trunk from highest numbered trunk or rotation can be determined through system programming Feature Guide 103 1 5 Making Call Features e A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis so that the operator or extension user can view the destination that the external caller is trying to reach before answering This is useful for example when multiple companies share the same operator e Itis possible to identify the trunk ports that have trunks connected This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk that is not connected Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port Connection 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Connection 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Connection 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 P
276. el operator s extension is treated as a busy extension similar to when performing PT programming Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone Feature Guide 1 27 Hospitality Features All other operations including pressing other Room Status Control buttons will be ignored In addition the lights of fixed and flexible buttons do not show their normal display pattern In order to perform other operations the hotel operator must exit Room Status Control mode Conditions An EMEC or MEC card must be installed to use guest billing functions A maximum of four hotel operators can be assigned Only one of each type of Room Status Control button can be assigned Extensions associated with rooms must be one of the following types PT including IP PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX PSs cannot be checked in and out as room extensions It is recommended that the extension number of a room extension is the same or similar to the room number for convenience The previous guest s billing data is only cleared when an extension is set back to Check in status Thus it is possible to edit guest charge data and reprint the bill at any time until another guest is checked in to the same room If enabled through system programming the check in and check out information is recorded on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA3105 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TD
277. elephone Features 238 Pulse to Tone Conversion 93 Q QSIG Enhanced Features 371 QSIG Standard Features 362 Queue Redirection Manual 58 Queuing Feature 57 Quick Dialling 115 Quick Setup 420 R Recall 162 Recording into the VPS Two way 287 Recording Direct 216 Redial Automatic 111 Redial Interrupt 111 Redial Last Number 111 Relay Control External 223 Remote Control 67 Remote Extension DialLock 142 Remote Station Lock Control gt Remote Extension Dial Lock 142 Reverse Circuit Op Revision History 448 Ring 51 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 441 RingTones 446 Ringing Line Preference 80 Room Status Control 316 Route Selection Automatic ARS 150 S S CO Line Access 103 Screening Live Call LCS 287 SDN Direct Dial 118 SDN Walking COS 118 SDN gt Secondary Directory Number 118 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 128 Secondary Directory Number SDN 118 Security Mode DISA 204 Sensor External 221 Setup Automatic 421 Setup Quick 420 SMDR gt Station Message Detail Recording 303 Software Upgrading 432 Special Carrier Access Code 100 Speed Dialling Personal System 113 Splitting Call 181 Station Hunting gt Idle Extension Hunting 45 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 303 Station Password Lock gt Extension PIN Lock 322 Station Programme Clear gt Extension Feature Clear 324 Station Speed Dialling gt Personal Speed Dialling 113 Subaddressing 250 Sup
278. em programming the call will be redirected to the destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call by the Intercept Routing feature Conditions General It is possible to call an extension extension port in a VM group directly If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group it is possible to enable some features e g FWD Idle Extension Hunting on the extension in the group The Voice Mail DTMF DPT Digital Integration e g command transmit is also available on the extension One touch Voice Mail Feature Access It is possible to assign a One touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature gt 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling For example to access a mailbox mailbox number 123 of the VPS extension number 165 directly assign 165 6123 to a One touch Dialling button When pressing this button the outgoing message OGM of the mailbox will be heard KX TDA30 All ports in a VM DPT group must be connected to either the same DLC card or to the pre installed Super Hybrid ports KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 All ports in a VM DPT group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port DPT Type Type for DPT or S Hybrid port DPT Type VM Unit No for DPT or S Hybrid port DPT Type VM Port No for DPT or S Hybrid port 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Sett
279. eneniendsnex tenia ooiuadecetemnacenetie 312 1 27 Hospitality Features a ssisisscisssntsacacesunsnasstaasinscssaxsacenanasescciuistsasssasensstaatadsnaadescsdaaaiannaetaaia 315 1 27 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY ENNER 315 127 2 ROOM telen eege Ee Seed 316 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest ROOM eege eer eebe 319 1 28 Extension Controlling Features c csscccssseeeesseseeeeeesseeeeeneseneeessneeeeeesesneeeeeneeeeeeess 322 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number DIN 322 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clem sgetEusstur geheegt chen 324 128 3 Walking EE 326 1 28 4 Timed Heminder Ennn nnn Ennan nnna nenna anneanne 327 1 29 Audible Tone Features sexeeseseeeseggesgegesseseeresgersgeeeeSSgeEASEEEEeESEEESEESEEE EES EE SEEbeER 329 ZS DRE ETC UR Le TE 329 1 292 Confirmation TOME E 331 1 30 Networking Features siiscscscssencssecis siestssannasenisasasaasbennssdsaassetansnaseseeuiasasiasnmnsewesaasteanannedess 333 1 30 1 TIELNE Servi EE 333 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network e ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeees 357 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN EE 360 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features 362 12041 QSIG Standard Features GUMMAPDNY nnsssssssisssnnsstnnesttnttrtttttntttnntttttt tnn EEAnrEEEAEE EAEE EEEEEEAEEENEEE EEEE EEEn EEEE 362 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by OG 364 1 30 4 3 C
280. enseaneees 394 2 2 1 Class of Service COS EN 394 22 2 GOUD EE 396 Feature Guide 13 14 223 e KE Ee 400 224 Elle 405 2 2 5 Operator EE 410 2 2 6 Manager Features irian re ee ee eee aaa aa ener 411 2 3 System Data Control eeuesseeeesgeeeesgeet eebe egeg ge 413 2 3 1 PG Program une EE 413 CRS RA RAM Re ele el EE 416 2 9 9 Password SSG URI E 418 234 elle EE 420 23 5 HEURE deene aot eae eee 421 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering AA 423 237 Floating EXtenSiON E 430 2 38 83 SoftWare UpgtadiNg eege eebe Eege 432 2 4 Fault Recovery DiagnosStics sxisaccsccccascecescssvetscansccecnasencntsvascecnsiacstesececnasicaieectessassaceceeaese 433 2 4 1 Power Failure Transler trantan tantre r tunanin annen nnen nnen na 433 2 4 2 Power Failure Restarts gg EES 435 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information 436 W e Tt E 439 3 1 Capacity of System RESOUICES wsscasaiscscsccssccdscceiiessnss scenestssnsscaseenneesecexsetensetesseetteeesesnes 440 3 2 Exclusive Features Table icics sccecs sacccsscictcuces aczeccsstaasatsansszatccsssasceeasesvescnacactzcacsazicuctsaaities 445 3 3 Ton es Ring TONGS iioiissice seiciecissc ct enctaeieecsncnsanetentnnecdewediedtacsasnensntasbeteeshadesenstuccueckuenceseivaauns 446 3 3 1 TOMBS AING TE 446 3 4 Revision E E 448 3 4 1 KX TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3 1XXX o cc cicccccecccseeeeceeseeeesesseeeeseseueuaeeeeeanes 448 3 4 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 1 In 449 3 4 3 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR
281. eption Code Tables as follows Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 00 Leading number to deny 00xx Leading number for country to be international calls allowed Level 3 090 Leading number to deny cellular O90xxxx Leading number for cellular phone calls phones to be allowed Leading number to deny both GE Long distance numbers for cities Level 4 0 international and long distance 06 to be allowed and leading number calls 090 of cellular phones Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e A COS should be assigned for each extension 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 602 Class of Service e TRS Barring checks are applied to the following ARS Trunk Access Idle Line Trunk Group S CO Line e itis programmable whether x or is checked by the TRS Barring This is useful in prevent
282. ered outside destinations such as cellular phones can be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through DISA When the Caller ID of a received trunk call matches an entry in the System Speed Dialling Table the calling telephone is given Walking COS authorisation as assigned to the corresponding CLI destination extension Therefore the CLI destination setting in the System Speed Feature Guide 205 1 17 Optional Device Features Dialling Table is used here to specify the target extension that the calling telephone will be recognised as for Walking COS Programming Example of DIL Table CLI Destination Trunk No Day Lunch Day Lunch 501 501 01 Disable Disable DISA DISA CLI must be set to Disable to allow incoming calls to be received by DISA Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table Trunk Access Location Name Telephone Number CLI Destination 000 J Smith 912341115678 200 001 In this example calls received on trunk 01 are routed to the DISA OGM with floating extension number 501 If the number of the received call after modification according to the Caller ID table is 12341115678 the call originator is recognised as extension 200 and the Walking COS feature is automatically activated System programming is required to enable this feature SMDR The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floa
283. erently for each mode 1 Time Service Switching Mode Day lunch break night mode can be switched either automatically or manually The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis Type Description Automatic The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table Manual A manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis can switch mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button Even while in the Automatic Switching mode day lunch break night mode can be changed manually Time Table Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode The Start and or End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively Feature Guide 405 2 2 System Configuration Software 406 Time Table Example Time Table No Tenant No Time Schedule 1 2 3 4 MON Day 1 start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00 Lunch start 12 00 NONE 16 00 12 00 Day 2 start 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NONE Break 1 end Day restart NONE NONE NONE NONE Night start 16 00 20 00 12 00 NONE TUE Day 1 start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00
284. ervisory Feature 67 SVMLog 217 SVM gt Built in Simplified Voice Message 215 System Configuration and Administration Features 391 System Configuration Hardware 392 System Configuration Software 394 System Data Control 413 System Speed Dialling 113 Feature Guide 469 Index System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Override by 133 T Ti Line Service 272 TAFAS gt Trunk Answer From Any Station 197 Tenant Service 400 Tenant to Tenant Call Block 401 Terminate 162 Terminated Hunting 45 Third Party Call Control 385 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 264 TIE Line Service 333 Time Service 405 Timed Reminder 327 Toll Restriction TRS 133 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 133 Tone Audible 329 Tone Call Waiting 130 Tone Confirmation 331 Tone Dial 329 Tones Ring Tones 446 Transfer Recall 173 Transfer Call 173 Transfer One touch 174 Transferring Features 173 TRS Barring Level 134 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 133 TRS Barring gt Toll Restriction Call Barring Features 133 Trunk Access 103 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 197 Trunk Busy Out 96 Trunk Call Features 89 Trunk Call Limitation 166 Trunk Group 396 Trunk Group Access 103 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 166 Two way Recording into the VPS 287 U UCD gt Uniform Call Distribution 51 Unattended Conference 185 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 51 Upgrading Software 432 User to user Sign
285. es on a DISA line an OGM is played gt 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM At the same time the PBX begins fax signal detection If a fax signal is detected the PBX recognises that the call is a fax call and transfers the call to the fax destination assigned to that OGM through system programming This allows a single trunk to be used seamlessly for both voice and fax calls with only voice calls arriving at user extensions This feature is only available for the KX TDA3O Available Automatic Fax Transfer Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension vi PS RW Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code A PS destination can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at another PBX connected by TIE line A virtual PS can be specified as the destination of fax calls Then the extension number of the fax machine at the other PBX can be specified as the FWD ALL Calls destination for calls to that virtual PS gt 1 25 6 Virtual PS Conditions e Hardware Requirement An MSG card e This feature is only effective for calls arriving on DISA lines e Ifa fax signal is not
286. ess from Trunk Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming If the PBX uses analogue trunks it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking COS access If an extension user who is accessing his message box through an analogue line goes on hook while the voice messages are being played the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish playing This is because a reorder tone cannot be detected from an analogue line while playing voice messages Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features e The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes playing e An extension user can only access the message box of another extension belonging to the card that the user accesses first For example if the user accesses a message box belonging to SVM card 1 first then the user can only access the message boxes of other extensions belonging to SVM card 1 If the user tries to access the message box of another extension belonging to a different card the user will hear a reorder tone While a reorder tone is heard it is possible to retry another call by pressing x e Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available only when voice messages have been left in the message box e It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting message e T
287. extension user groups each of which is used to compose the following groups a Tenant gt 2 2 3 Tenant Service b Call Pickup Group See below c Paging Group See below Every extension must belong to one extension user group but cannot belong to more than one extension user group 2 9 4 3 2 User Group 603 Extension User Group Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX Example Extension 1 1 Extension i Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4 Jal ye Extn 106 Extn 107 Extn 104 Extn 105 fo 66 BE 1 Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 I 2 1 Call Pickup Group Using the Group Call Pickup feature extensions can answer any calls within a specified group One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 9 5 3 3 Call Pickup Group 2 9 6 8 3 Call Pickup Group All Setting 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Example Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3 Extension Extension Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4 I T P e Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 2 2 Paging Group Using the Paging feature extensions can make a page to any paging groups or answer a page to their own group
288. f the monitored extension as follows Light pattern Status Off The monitored extension is idle Red on The monitored extension is busy or has set DND for trunk calls Example Network LS 2001 bus PBX 1 i husy Network ID 1 1001 busy Is Monitor extension JE 2002 idle Extn 2001 Extn 2002 Extn 4001 JE 4001 idle dei Monitor extension 1 Extn 1001 1 Extn 2002 Programming Procedure 1 Routing Table Assignment TIE Line Routing and Modification tables must have been programmed in advance for all PBXs in the network to allow calls to be made and transferred between PBXs gt 1 30 1 TIE Line Service In the programming example that follows the PBXs in the network use the Extension Number method as shown in the illustration above However the PBX Access Code method can also be used 2 Network PBX ID Assignment Assign a Network PBX ID to each PBX in the network 2 15 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID e IDs 1 8 Can monitor extensions at other PBXs and transmit monitor data about local extensions Each ID number can be assigned to one PBX within the network e IDO Retransmits monitor data throughout the network This ID number can be assigned to multiple PBXs Feature Guide 371 1 30 Networking Features
289. feature to maintain secure data transmission by preventing tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Data Line Security Set Cancel 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Data Mode PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 8 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security Feature Guide 161 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 162 Description The FLASH RECALL button Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode or Terminate button Terminate mode is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first It performs the same function as going on hook and then going off hook Explanation of Each Mode Flash Recall Mode Disconnects the line The extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last For example if a trunk call is disconnected the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company Terminate Mode Disconnects the line The extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference Outgoing setting 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Conditions e FLASH RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming Flash Recall mode Terminate mode External Feat
290. for each extension in the group The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set yY vy yy 3 Extn Extn Extn Extn A B Cc D a Rings immediately simultaneously Delayed Ringing Rings after a specified time delay Feature Guide 51 1 2 Receiving Group Features 52 2 Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Call Waiting When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone To use this feature e Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming This determines the distribution method for waiting calls e Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually or they will not be notified gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates Programming Conditions Result Group Call Group Call Group Call Waiting Capable Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution Method Telephone Distribution UCD UCD PT PS with idle Priority Hunting Priority Hunting ICD Group button Ring Not available Any telephone All UCD Priority Hunting Ring Ring Incoming calls enter the queue immediately Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone Example e Group Call Waiting mode All e Gro
291. formation is forwarded to another PBX its counter is increased by one When this counter reaches the assigned maximum the data is discarded This is used to prevent data from circling unnecessarily around the Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features network 2 15 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter e If it is not possible to remotely turn off transmission of extension status information using the NDSS Monitor Release feature because of network conditions it is possible to perform the same operation directly through system programming at the monitored PBX 2 10 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send 2 10 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send e When using a VoIP network if extension status information is lost by the network in some cases an NDSS button may not be able to display the status of the relevant extension e NDSS can not be used when two PBXs are networked using the TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number feature 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN CO Networking Data Transfer 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Networking Data Transfer 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Manager 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button
292. g 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Feature Guide 225 1 18 Caller ID Features 226 3 Number Name Assignment 3 1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller s number according to preprogrammed tables The modified number will be recorded for calling back This PBX supports 4 modification tables each of which can be used for any number of trunk groups Each table has 10 locations for local international calls and one for long distance calls The PBX checks the local international call data first If a match is not found the long distance call data is applied Example lt Table Selection gt Trunk Modification Group No Table lt Modification Table gt 1 ele pf Modification Table 1 2 3 Area Code Removed No of Digits Added No f Local International 12 3 Blank Call Data 1 Local International 00 2 001 Call Data 2 Local International Call Data 10 Long Distance Not o 0 Call Data programmable Note When caller s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber National or International the following modification table is used instead of the above table lt Modification Table gt DEENEN Removed No of Digits Added No Subscriber Call Data 0 Blank National Call Data 0 0 International Call Data 0 00 Feature Guide 1 18 Caller ID Features
293. g If no members have answered the call the caller will hear a busy tone The broadcasting call will reach a member extension regardless of settings such as Call Forwarding except DND If a member extension is busy and has Call Waiting for trunk calls activated when a broadcasting call is made a call waiting tone will be sent to the extension The call information of the caller not members will be recorded on SMDR A caller cannot make a broadcasting call with a call on hold Call Pickup is not available for a broadcasting call gt 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup The broadcasting call will not reach members when the member extension has set DND for intercom calls the member extension is a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA3105 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Feature Guide 1 16 Broadcasting Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Broadcasting Ring Duration 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Broadcasting Operation 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR Broadcasting Operation 2 9 24 3 10 Broadcasting Group 2 9 25 3 10 Broadcasting Group Member List PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resou
294. g extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming 278 Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others lIntercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command Recording message command H Recording message command 6 H Mailbox Nol H H Mailbox Nol AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None Default DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Example of a amp b Trunk Call Sent 6 102 PBX ore mailbox ner Switching to VM command FWD Intercept Transfer VPS In AA service mode Operator VM Port 1 gt VM Port 2 A VM DTMF f Group VM Port X VM Port 3
295. git 038 4 03 is found in two locations locations 0001 and 0002 so the PBX waits for the next digit 8 038 is not found in any location then 03 location 0002 is selected The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected Routing Plan Table Assignment Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority Time Table As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day four time blocks Time A through D can be programmed for each day of the week 2 14 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting 330 ARS Routing Plan Time Table Carrier Priority Assign the appropriate carrier refer to 5 Carrier Table Assignment and their priority in each time block The carrier is selected in the entry order the order in which entries are listed 2 14 5 8 4 Routing Plan Priority 331 346 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 3 ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading RER Routing Plan No No No of Digits Table No ARS Routing Plan Table 0001 03 8 Routing Plan Table 1 l Carrier Time Table Priority 1 Priority 2 SUN Time A 9 00 1 A telecom 4 D telecom Time B 12 00 1 A telecom 2 B telecom Time C 15 00 1 A telecom 2 B telecom Time D 21 00 3 C telecom 1 A telecom SAT Time A 9 00 3 C telecom 2 B
296. gs Main COS 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide 139 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 140 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 2 13 1 7 1 Denied Code 2 13 2 7 2 Exception Code 2 13 3 7 3 Special Carrier Code 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous PT Programming Manual 300 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 301 TRS Barring Denied Code 302 TRS Barring Exception Code 501 TRS Barring Level 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 602 Class of Service Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 2 Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit an extension user cannot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the amoun
297. gt Private Call Conditions e Each BRI PRI port can be set to public or VPN through system programming To use this service select VPN 360 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features e Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming and or Quick Dialling programming gt 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Quick Dialling Programming Example Location No Quick Dialling No Desired No Quick Dialling 01 2345 extension no of other PBX 9 123 4321 Public no of extension 2345 Explanation When an extension user dials 2345 he is connected to extension 2345 of other PBX whose public number is 123 4321 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 14 2 8 2 Leading Number Leading Number 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Leading Number Removed Number of Digits Added Number PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Feature Guide 361 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Description QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in
298. hat is the TRS Barring level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables The call is denied The user hears reorder tone 136 Feature Guide Is TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling enabled Checks the TRS Barring level for System Speed Dialling of the extension s COS y The call is made 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features TRS Barring Settings for Each Level Through system programming it is possible to select a different method of TRS Barring With this method each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes which are only applied to that level 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Table Mode for Level N N 2_6 MPR Software File Version 3 2000 or later Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables 2 Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 Table for Level 2 Table for Level 2 Level 3 Table for Level 3 Table for Level 3 Level 4 Table for Level 4 Table for Level 4 Level 5 Table for Level 5 Table for Level 5 Level 6 Table for Level 6 Table for Level 6 Level 7 Not Programmable Not Programmable 1 2 13 1 7 1 Denied Code Denied Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 301 TRS Barring Denied Code 2 2 13 2 7 2 Exception Code Exception Cod
299. he PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend Enabling DISA security Trunk Security or All Security Keeping passwords verification code PINs extension PINs secret Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed a b c d Changing PINs regularly e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An MSG card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An OPB card and MSG card e DI SA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message OGM 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Recall Hold Recall 209 DISA Delayed Answer Time e Call Retry While hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone retrying the call is possible by pressing x System Feature Guide 209 1 17 Optional Device Features 210 programming selects whether pressing during a trunk to trunk conversation returns to the DISA top menu or sends a DTMF tone DISA Mute Time It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Mute amp OGM Start Timer after Answering End of Call Detection If a call through DISA is routed to a trunk DISA can be use
300. he SVM card does not answer calls that are forwarded using the Call Forwarding by QSIG feature 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Installation Manual References 2 5 5 SVM2 Card KX TDA3192 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 4 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recordings KX TDA30 only 2 4 6 Tool Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage KX TDA30 only 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous SVM Recording Time KX TDA30 only SVM Dial Tone Continuous Time KX TDA30 only 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Simplified Voice Message Access KX TDA30 only 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Tone Detection Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Silence KX TDA30 only Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Continuous KX TDA30 only Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Cyclic KX TDA30 only 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Display Lock SVM Lock KX TDA30 only 2 10 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message KX TDA30 only 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 SVM Lock KX TDA30 only 2 10 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message KX TDA30 only 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Recording Mode Remote Access 2 11 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM KX TDAS30 only PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 29
301. he directory Depending on the PS model the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation Type Description PS Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers System Speed Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names and Directory numbers PBX Extension Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension Directory names Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers Quick Dialling Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private directory of names and numbers Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Name 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name PT Programming Manual 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 004 Extension Name 296 Feature Guide 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 4 PS Feature Buttons Description A PS user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons button a specified number x or and or display operation The flexible buttons and the display are customised through PS programming The button assignment is the same for PT 1 20 2 Flexi
302. he following calls e An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line e An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3 05 AM if enabled through system programming Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment Conditions e SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guide 421 2 3 System Data Control Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 4 Tool 2 4 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 2 8 1 2 1 Date amp Time Daylight Saving 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Automatic Time Adjustment by ISDN amp Caller ID FSK PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 422 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Description To dial another extension user or to access PBX features the access numbers extension numbers or feature numbers are required There are three types of numbering plans 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone i
303. hether an incoming TIE line call can make a trunk call through this PBX i e PBX 2 depends on the COS that is assigned to the trunk group of this PBX that the incoming TIE line is connected to If the COS of the trunk group is unable to make outgoing calls by the Toll Restriction Barring feature or External Call Block feature trunk calls made through this PBX Feature Guide will be prohibited To override this prohibition an extension of PBX 1 must enter a verification code assigned to PBX 2 to change the COS temporarily It is also possible to override the prohibition by specifying an extension at PBX 2 with the Walking COS feature to temporarily switch to that extension s COS 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 2 12 3 6 3 Verification Code 500 Trunk Group Number Programming Example of PBX 2 Trunk Group No COS No 1 3 2 2 3 2 TRG of Incoming Outgoing Call Call COS 1 Y Y COS 2 Y COS 3 Y Y vw Block 1 30 Networking Features Example lt Extension Number Method Access Without PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network wee ww rm pm ee ee rm rm rm ee ee rm rm pm bm mm SI TRG 1 COS 3 TIE Line of PBX 2 gt Interface verification code entry feature no x verification code verifica
304. hile end talk KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 9 3 8 1 3 Trunk Group Charge Rate 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Margin A Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point Charge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Charge Options Meter Start on Answer Detection PT Programming Manual 010 Charge Margin 011 Charge Tax 012 Charge Rate per Unit 130 Decimal Point Position for Currency 131 Currency 491 Pay Tone Signal Type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 1 27 Hospitality Features 1 27 Hospitality Features 1 27 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY Description This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel type environment where extensions correspond to guest rooms Feature Description amp Reference Room Status Control An extension designated as the hotel operator can set the check in status
305. hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone e While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR OHCA Whisper OHCA PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 8 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Feature Guide 131 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Description An extension user can send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard directly by only the called extension user through the handset without interrupting the ongoing conversation The caller cannot hear the ongoing conversation or the called extension user s reply unless the called extension user puts the current party on hold and switches to the waiting caller Conditions e COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature e This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telep
306. hones KX T7600 series KX T7500 series KX T7400 series except KX T7451 IP PT e If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone e If the called extension does not use a KX T7600 KX T7500 or KX T7400 series telephone or an IP PT but forces Whisper OHCA the announcement may be heard by the other party e Itis possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone However it may not work properly e g The voice may be heard by the other party e While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone e While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR OHCA Whisper OHCA PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 8 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off
307. ht SLTs can receive Caller ID Note that SLTs connected in parallel to DPTs attached to Super Hybrid ports can only receive Caller ID information when set to ring mode e When the caller s number is sent to an SLT a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back e When the caller s number exceeds 16 digits the SLT receives only the first 16 digits not counting the preceding Trunk Access number if it is programmed to be added e Ifa callis transferred to an SLT the transferring extension s information will be shown on the SLT If the transferring extension goes on hook before the call is answered the original caller s information will be shown e When the Caller ID has information such as private out of area or long distance the information will be shown instead of the caller s number and name e Even if the caller s name is sent the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT e Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 228 Feature Guide 1 18 Caller ID Features 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Caller D Waiting to receive Caller D Visual Caller ID Display 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Private Network Public Call through Private Network Minimum Public Caller ID Digits 2 8 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Gro
308. ide 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override e Sensor call information is output on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card KX TDA3161 2 5 2 DPH2 Card KX TDA3162 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 4 ElO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 4 ElO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 39 1 1 Slot OPB KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Input Signal Decision Time Input Signal Detection Reopening Time 2 7 43 1 1 Slot DPH Card Property KX TDA30 only For Sensor ElO Input Signal Decision Time For Sensor EIO Input Signal Detection Reopening Time 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous External Sensor Ring Duration 2 8 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others External Sensor Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 11 7 5 5 External Sensor PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 10 External Relay Control Description By turning external device relays on and off the PBX can control external devices such as alarms When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number the s
309. ification Code Budget Management 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Charge Options Action at Charge Limit PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 141 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock Description An extension user can change the TRS Barring level of the telephone 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls An extension personal identification number PIN is used to unlock the telephone 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout Conditions e This feature also restricts changing the FWD destination gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD e Remote Extension Dial Lock Overrides Extension Dial Lock If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the user cannot unlock it If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user the extension will be unlocked This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control e TRS Barring Level COS programming determines the TRS Barring level for Extension Dial Lock Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension Dial Lock Set Cancel
310. ification Number The Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL DID DDI MSN features Feature Description amp Reference CLI Distribution Calling Line Identification Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller s identification number has been assigned in the Caller ID Table gt 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Feature Guide 17 1 1 Incoming Call Features 18 4 Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type ees DIL DID DDI MSN ELCOT LCOT v DID vw Vi T1 LCOT vr GCOT v DID vi Was TIE E amp M vr Vv E1 DR2 Vv Was E amp M C v Y E amp M P Bi Vv E amp M v BRI CO vi v Vv PRI CO vi ke v Enable default vw Enable 5 Available Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS v Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Vv Floating Extension no for SVM vi VM Group DTMF DPT Vv External Pager TAFAS Y DISA Y Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Destination Availability Other PBX Ex
311. igned incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM CO or PDN button The mode of ICD Group buttons can be selected through system programming as follows Standard Mode Group DN Button Mode An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension does not belong to through system programming However the ICD Group button will not receive calls to that group Enhanced Phantom Button Mode An extension can join an ICD Group just by creating a button for that group even if the extension was not previously registered as a member When the button is created the extension will be Feature Guide 49 1 2 Receiving Group Features automatically registered in the lowest numbered available member slot for the group Calls to the group can be received at the extension with no further programming If no member slots are available for that group the button cannot be created and an alarm tone will be heard When creating an ICD Group button in this mode the user can also specify the delayed ringing settings If an extension user deletes the last ICD Group button at his extension for a certain group he will also be deregistered as a member from that group e Group FWD The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis e COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or di
312. ile incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode Calls have been distributed by DIL DID DDI CLI The number in the circle is the queuing order Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Distribution Distribution Distribution Distribution Group 1 ei Group 2 Group 3 ER Group 4 for VIP for general for special for general O customers customers customers 3rd Priority 3rd pe 2nd H Priority vee Distribution order 1 O From Group 1 Group3 Groups 2 and 4 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous VIP Call Mode PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Description When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Busy on Busy 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions a b c d e There is no space in the waiting queue The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in An
313. ile the PS is in idle status PBX A cs cs e Handover Interface Li lt Calls will not be Ki disconnected CS However Handover is not available in any of the following cases a When the new Handover CS is busy b When there is no CS within range c While the Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration d While the PS user is paging other extensions 1 15 1 Paging e During a doorphone call gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call f While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call g During aconversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone to which the conversation is being recorded h While participating as a member of a broadcasting call gt 1 16 1 Broadcasting Feature Guide 291 1 25 Portable Station PS Features e When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy the caller hears a busy tone KX TDA600 e When an EMEC card is installed the total number of PSs that the PBX supports will increase Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 8 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 9 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA600 2 10 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 11 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Prog
314. ime Table Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires e Manual Queue Redirection It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry up button If the call is already ringing at an extension it will not be redirected This feature is also known as Hurry up Transfer e Hurry up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry up button The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable The button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue Off No queued call Red on At or under the assigned number for Hurry up Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry up Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Incoming Call Queue Monitor 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Transfer tTransfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Queuing Time Table Miscellaneous Extension No Answer Redirection Time Miscellaneous Maximum No of Busy Extensions 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Call Waiting on VM Group 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others Call Waiting on VM Group 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension
315. in log out status of the corresponding group The light pattern is the same as the Log in Log out button that includes the group number es Wrap up Timer Two wrap up timers can be programmed an ICD Group member wrap up timer and an extension wrap up timer System programming selects which timer is used When the ICD Group member wrap up timer is selected the timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group When the extension wrap up timer is selected the timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap up time Other calls are received as normal The wrap up timer does not work for ISDN extensions or PS Ring Groups es Wrap up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap up button It shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Wrap up Red on Not Ready Off Ready Wrap up mode cancel e When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap up time gt 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode e Automatic Log out A member extension may be logged out automatically if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group If the extension is a member of more than on
316. ination 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 34 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls that do not have a destination assigned The intercept destination is an operator tenant PBX Conditions e Intercept Routing No Destination on off The Intercept Routing No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled a reorder tone will be sent to the caller However the Intercept Routing No Destination feature always functions for calls through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card even when disabled e If an operator tenant PBX is not assigned The extension connected to the lowest numbered jack will be the intercept destination e Intercept Routing No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 3 2 2 Operator A BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 2 16 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed PT Programming Manual 006 Operator Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Feature Guide 35 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 Internal Call Features 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY Description The fol
317. ine according to the assignment of the DID call destination of PBX 1 gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Destination Day Lunch Break Night 453 DID Destination 336 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features b FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the TIE Line Example Telephone Company oe JI TIE Line Network a PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 Trunk i TIE Line PBX 2 h interface f Interface i Forwarded Transferred ta j i L Intercepted to 7 952 2011 i Outside Caller KC eis Extn 1011 Extn 2011 Dials 123 4567 Explanation An outside caller dials 123 4567 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 1 and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line Feature Guide 337 1 30 Networking Features 2 2 TIE to Trunk Access The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines a Trunk Call through Other PBXs by Making a TIE Line Call Method Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network Peco ele Soe eos eS Se hoe E PBX 1 9 211 4567 ee mm mm el em mm e mm E TIE Line TRG 2 gt Interface LCI III _ 7 Outside Party Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 802 9 21 1 4567
318. ing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Check for dial e itis programmable whether TRS Barring checks the digits dialled after the External Feature Access during a trunk call gt 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Check after EFA e Host PBX Access Code Special Carrier Access Code TRS Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX or a Special Carrier Access code gt 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code in the following cases 138 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Stored Type Not stored Found Not found Host PBX Access Code Deletes the code A The call is made TRS Barring checks TRS Barring check is excepted from TRS the whole number carried out on the Barring following digits Special Carrier Access Deletes the code A TRS Barring checks TRS Barring checks Code TRS Barring check is the whole number the whole number carried out on the following digits e ARS If ARS is applied to a dialled number TRS Barring will check the user dialled number not the modified number by ARS In this case a Host PBX Access code and or a Special Carrier Access code will not be checked e Dialling Digit Restriction during
319. ing System is Connected Feature Guide 283 1 24 Voice Mail Features 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 284 Description A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT Digital Integration e g the KX TVP200 can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion DPT Digital Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX Feature Explanation 1 Automatic Configuration Quick Setup The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing If the Intercept to Mailbox setting is enabled through system programming the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System
320. ing Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 8 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 8 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Description The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company There are the following types Type Description Advice of Charge During Call AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed AOC D Advice of Charge AOC is received when the call is completed At End of Call AOC E Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge AOC supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No One DSS1 protocol e A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call e Budget Management If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit an extension user cannot make further calls gt 1 9 2 Budget Management es AOC for ISDN extension An ISDN extension also receives AOC Programming Manual References PC Progra
321. ing group basis through system programming Called Party s Name Number or Caller s Name Number e Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned to the following groups Method Assignment Merit Demerit Incoming Call Assign all desired PSs to All PS users in the The CS may often Distribution Group one incoming call group can use the be busy as each PS distribution group and set Log in Log out in the group uses the group call distribution feature Wrap up one channel when a method for the group to feature and ICD call arrives at the Ring Group button for the group group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features PS Ring Group Assign all desired PSs to Only one channel is PS users in the one PS ring group used when a call group cannot use arrives at the group the Log in Log out and Wrap up features e When a PS joins a PS ring group the following personal settings are disregarded a When the PS ring group is called Delayed Ringing Display information when the incoming calls arrive The settings e g display priority are disregarded The setting which is assigned on the PS e g FWD The status of the PS e g busy b Log in log out setting from the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group which the PS ring group belongs to 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Note
322. ings 2 9 17 8 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings PT Programming Manual 601 Terminal Device Assignment 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Description The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail VM service mode and Automated Attendant AA service mode or to inform the extension status e g busy The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT The following answering services and features are available 1 Voice Mail VM Service Mode When a caller reaches the VPS the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox Example The VPS sends the message to the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for The caller dials the mailbox number Then the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX l The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller You have reached Mike s voice mail am sorry cannot take
323. ion data above the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must be changed individually When changing the PS setting use the PS s original extension number not the main telephone s extension number if required e When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set the following extension data for the wired telephone is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled Call Waiting Setting gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting FWD DND Setting gt 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Call Pickup Deny Setting gt 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Busy Override Deny Setting 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Itemised Billing Code for ARS 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 13 2 Call Park CLIP COLP Number and CLIP COLP Number Selection 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIR and COLR Setting gt 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN COS Programming gt 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Extension User Group gt 2 2 2 Group e If Extension Feature Clear is performed the corresponding extension data for both the
324. ion is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type This feature is also known as Station Hunting Type Description Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way Incoming call M Busy Extn Exin gt Extn gt 2 Assigned order gt Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension Incoming call y Busy Extn gt Extn gt Extn Assigned order gt X Conditions e idle Extension Hunting applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls to a single destination e An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group e Ifall the searched extensions are busy The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Available Destination Destination Avai
325. is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 The number sent from PBX 2 3011 is an extension number of PBX 3 The call is received at extension 3011 When aTIE line call is sent from one PBX to another the receiving PBX first modifies the received number according to the assignment for the trunk port the number of digits removed and the number added are determined by this assignment Then the PBX checks whether the completed number is an existing extension number at that PBX Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Example A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 from TIE Line Network PBX 1 If the number sent from PBX EES PBX4 PBx 3 i 1 has the PBX code of PBX 2 952 i PBX Code 954 PBX Code 953 i the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX 2 e e g 10110f PBX 2 If not PBX 2 Extn 1011 checks the number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 i Ifthe match is found in the table the Joss II eall will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 The number sent from PBX 2 953 1011 has the PBX code of PBX 3 953 1011 gt SES J Extn 1011 Extn 1011 i PBX 1 PBX 2 953 The call is received at Dials 7 953 1011 1 g e EE a OA COIE DSE arnari extension 1011 of PBX 3 Note When a
326. is shown on the display of a display PT Pressing the lit Message button while on hook shows the caller s information as shown below Example 105 Tom Smith Extension no and name of who left the message Message buttons CTT Own extension CTT Incoming call distribution group C___ Other extension NZ NZ ze For example this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss Boss amp Secretary Feature Conditions Message Button A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension other extensions or an incoming call distribution group Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension gt 1 29 1 Dial Tone SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT if an EMSLC or MSLC card is connected to the PBX The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the 12 patterns shown below System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature Feature Guide 233 1 19 Message Features SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns lt gt 1 28s Pattern 1 ON OFF Pattern 2 ON OFF ON Pattern 3 OFF Pattern 4 ON OFF Pattern 5 ok OFF Patt 6 S i attern OFF Pattern 7 ON OFF
327. istrator level PC programming The installer can specify which system programming settings are available System Password PC for Used with the installer level programmer code to access Installer installer level PC programming All system programming settings are available 418 The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console 2 4 10 Tool Programmer Code Change option For more information about programmer codes see Section 2 1 2 Access Levels in the PC Programming Manual The required format of each code is as follows Item Length User Level Programmer Code 0 16 characters Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Installer Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX keep the passwords secret and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords and the possible dangers if they become known to others 3 The PBX has default passwords preset For security change these passwords the first time that you programme the PBX 4 Change the passwords periodically 5 Itis strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access For a list of numbers and characters that can be use
328. istribution VM Voice Mail VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol VPN gt Virtual Private Network VPS Voice Processing System XDP gt EXtra Device Port Feature Guide 9 Table of Contents 10 Call Handling REN BO INCOMING Ke 16 Incoming Trunk Call Features EE 16 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY AA 16 Directs Lime DIL E 20 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DD 22 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service eceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeneeenatenas 25 Calling Line Identification CLI Dietrbugon ee eee cece eece een eeeeeeeneeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeeeseaeeeaeeeeeteeseaeeeieeseaeeeneeee 28 Intercept ROWING EE 30 Intercept Routing No Destination AAA 35 ua Ee IR 36 Internal Call Features GUMMAPDNY A 36 Internal Call BlOCK i arrere e vas shedends E sntectstcaceaschcasesecuchenlengcedsestse ans ue r aaa ENEE 38 Incoming ee e NEE 40 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARPY A A0 Ring Tone Pattern Selection AA 41 Call Wati g ariii nenten esn AA itis ee et Ae ene Neen ees 43 Receiving Group Features ssniecsnicccssistenctinssssasnacnacsinicnsanscnsasseieessnnnsassaieesdssntedeenasienadeisss 45 idle Extension Hunting i beiegt eecht deeg 45 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features EE 47 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features GUMMAPDN AA 47 Group Call Distribution ssis eee eee eeeeceeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeaeeseaeseaeseaeeseees
329. ital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access The KX TDA100E KX TDA200E KX TDA100NE KX TDA200NE KX TDA100GR KX TDA200GR and KX TDA100CE KX TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access e ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S The KX TDA600E KX TDA600NE KX TDA600GR and KX TDA600CE are designed to interwork with the e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Company U K Ltd declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting http www doc panasonic de Contact Panasonic Services Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15 2
330. itional extension cards 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Parallel Mode An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT EXtra Device Port XDP Mode An SLT can be connected to a DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX Unlike parallel mode XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number Digital XDP A DPT can be connected to another DPT that is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid port of the PBX Similar to XDP mode each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number Portable Station PS Features PSs e g KX TCA255 KX TD7690 can be connected to this PBX It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone gt 1 25 Portable Station PS Features Hospitality Features This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel type environment Extensions corresponding to guest rooms can be checked in or checked out by a designated hotel operator who can also check or set wake up calls and print out records of guest charges 1 27 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Features By just installing an optiona
331. ivated e The Inter digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Receiving Dial Inter digit Timer TIE Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property for CO port 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property for TIE channel 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Trunk Property 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Receiving Dial Inter digit Timer TIE 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Idle Line Access Local Access Trunk Group Access TIE Line Access 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Other PBX Extension 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Optional SD Card Required 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL Trunk Property DIL DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night DDI DID TIE MSN 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Destination Day Lunch Break Night PT Programming
332. l None User Manual References 1 8 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 130 Feature Guide 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Description An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built in speaker and microphone of the called party s PT If the existing call is using a handset a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties Conditions e COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature e This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones KX T7625 KX T7630 KX T7633 KX T7636 KX T7536 KX T7436 KX T7235 except KX T7235G FR SL NE e ifthe KX T7235G FR SL NE are connected to the PBX the OHCA feature for the KX T7235 should be disabled through system programming e The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases a COS or called extension s telephone type is not available for this feature b The called extension DPT is connected to a PC PC Console or PC Phone via the USB Module c The called extension DPT is in the Digital XDP connection The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone e While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on
333. l begin playing automatically After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing the voice messages will begin playing from the most recent voice message again When all voice messages have been played this time the extension user will hear dial tone 4 and the line will be disconnected automatically SVM Remote Access from Trunk An extension user can remotely access his message box through a trunk by calling his own extension and using the Walking COS feature This allows the user to for example check the voice messages left in his message box when he is out of the office Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to for example record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group as described below In addition if the user s telephone has a Message button for another extension the user can easily access the message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group When a call is redirected to an SVM card from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing Overflow 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature or Call Forwarding FWD the greeting message for the first extension assigned to that ICD Group will be played and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that extension s message box A virtual PS can be
334. l identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN When an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX the number of entries programmable for each extension is increased System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling It is possible to override the TRS Barring using the System Speed Dialling gt 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL STORE Button Pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button on a display DPT while on hook can display the System Speed Dialling Directory When an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX System Speed Dialling numbers can be assigned separately for each tenant depending on the PBX used KX TDAS30 Each tenant can select to use either the original set of common System Speed Dialling numbers or the additional common set KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Each tenant can select to use either the original set of common System Speed Dialling numbers or the set of System Speed Dialling numbers designated specifically for that tenant Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA3105 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 Feature Guide 113 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 114 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features
335. l to an Extension Not Answered Forwarded to Mailbox PEN Private network lt Mailbox 201 Hello am not at my desk right now jal Extn 20 Extn Fwd to VPS 202 i Explanation Extension 201 does not answer the outside call so the call is forwarded to the VPS and answered by mailbox 201 If the outside caller leaves a message the VPS sends a Message Waiting notification to the extension using Enhanced QSIG information over the private network When forwarding the call PBX 2 sends any received call information Caller ID number name DDI number Feature Guide 377 1 30 Networking Features 378 along with the VM trunk group number to use applicable time mode and extension number and forwarding reason of the original destination extension to PBX 1 as Enhanced QSIG information Multiple VPSs More than one PBX in the network can have a VPS connected and each VPS can provide voice mail services for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network Conditions Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in the PBX connected to the VPS and in all PBXs that will use this feature All PBXs in the network must be TDA series PBXs Only KX TVA KX TVM series VPSs connected using DPT integration support this feature Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less using
336. l voice message card in the PBX simple answering machine services can be provided 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Cellular Phone Features KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 KX TDA3920 required This PBX supports the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX Cellular phones can be treated as extensions within the PBX and paired with wired telephones in Cellular Phone XDP Parallel Mode 1 33 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY 6 Feature Guide List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant ACD Automatic Call Distribution ANI Automatic Number Identification AOC Advice of Charge APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone ARS Automatic Route Selection B BGM Background Music BRI Basic Rate Interface C CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CF Call Forwarding by ISDN CLI Calling Line Identification CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIR gt Calling Name Identification Restriction COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CONP Connected Name Identification Presentation CONR gt Connected Name Identification Restriction COS gt Class of Service CPC gt Calling Party Control CS gt Cell Station CT gt Call Transfer by ISDN CTI Computer Telephony Integra
337. lability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS E Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv Feature Guide 45 1 2 Receiving Group Features Destination Availability PS Ring Group Vv VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code S ISS IS IS IS ISS Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e FWD DND Mode While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension that has set FWD AIl Calls or DND feature will be skipped and the call will go to the next extension in the group Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 14 3 6 Extension Hunting Group 2 9 15 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Member List PT Programming Manual 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 46 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Description An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming 2 9 13 3 5 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
338. le a connected PC Example If message 1 is preprogrammed as Started work and message 2 as Finished work employees can sign in by selecting message 1 when starting work and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing A connected PC can then be used to generate employee work records Conditions e Up to seven s can be stored for each message Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Printing Message 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 311 1 26 Administrative Information Features 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Description The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and SMDR 1 Call Charge Signal Services The type of call charge service that is used by the PBX is decided by the type of signal received from the telephone company The type of call charge signal received from the telephone company depends on the trunk of the outgoing call The services for each available trunk type are as follows Trunk Service
339. le to assign NDSS buttons for extensions that have been previously registered in the Network Monitor Extensions Table 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS Extensions connected to one PBX can monitor a maximum of 250 extensions at other PBXs One extension can be monitored by multiple extensions at multiple PBXs To reduce NDSS data traffic it is recommended that 8 or less extensions in a single Incoming Call Distribution Group be monitored Activation of an NDSS button is only required the first time that a button for a newly registered extension is created Once an NDSS button has been activated by being pressed the first time any further NDSS buttons for the same monitored extension will automatically display the extension status without needing to be activated To use the NDSS Monitor Release feature an extension must be assigned as a manager 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Manager 511 Manager Assignment A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information ON Through system programming it is possible to assign a maximum number of hops transfers between PBXs that extension status information can travel Each time a piece of extension status in
340. lexible Buttons 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guide 437 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 438 Feature Guide Section 3 Appendix Feature Guide 439 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 3 1 System Capacity of System Resources Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Absent Message Extension 1 x 16 characters Absent Message System 8 x 16 characters Call Park Zone 100 Conference Each shelf 3 8 parties 3 8 parties per conference 32 parties total per conference 32 parties total COS 64 DID DDI Table 32 digits 1000 entries Extension number 1 5 digits 1 4 digits for PSs 2 4 digits for extensions which have a VM DPT mailbox Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 10 digits 1 entry extension Host PBX Access Code 10 digits 10 entries trunk group Multiple Subscriber Number MSN 10 entries per ISDN BRI port Number of Characters of Name 20 Printing message 8 Queuing Time Table 64 128 Ring Tone Pattern Plan 8 Simultaneous Programmers e one system programmer 63 personal programmers e one manager programmer 63 personal programmers e 64 personal programmers SMDR Call Storage 200 calls 4000 calls w MEC card 1000 calls 4000 calls w 200 calls EMEC card Special Carrier Access Code 16 digits 20 entries 16 digits 100 entries Tenant 8
341. ling Features 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and or the PBX system data A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation 1 Features Feature Storing Method amp Reference One touch Dialling e Personal Programming e System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling KX T7710 One touch Dialling KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log Recently dialled telephone numbers are automatically stored 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Speed Dialling Personal e Personal Programming e Personal Operation with the Feature Number e System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System System System Programming 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Quick Dialling System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Feature Storing Method amp Reference Hot Line 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Personal Programming Personal Operation with the Feature Number System Programming PC Programming only Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is automatically stored 1 18 2 Incoming Call
342. ling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 13 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 88 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Trunk Call Features 1 5 4 1 Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call Feature Description amp Reference Emergency Call A user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode to access special services 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Pause Insertion A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time into a dialling number by pressing the PAUSE button or it is automatically inserted between the user dialled code e g Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code and the following digits 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Feature Guide 89 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 2 90 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a trunk reg
343. ll not be shown 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options Caller ID Number amp Name DID DDI number Controls whether the DID DDI number name number and name or nothing is shown If none is selected lt D gt will not be shown gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options DDI DID Number amp Name Secret dialling Controls secret dialling If enabled the dialled number will be shown as dots This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected in ARS dial setting above If the user dialled number is selected in ARS dial setting the dialled number will be shown as dots regardless of this setting 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options Secret Dial Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial If enabled the last four digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as X eg 123 456 XXXX gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options Privacy Mode Date order The date order is changeable month day year day month year year month day year day month gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Format Date Format Received call Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is shown gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options Condition Code RC Answered call Controls whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is shown 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options Condition Code
344. loating extension numbers as the destination Multistep DISA AA Service If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA the DISA AA service is not employed 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message 1 Digit AA Destination Extension Number Dial 0 9 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA 2nd Dial Timer for AA Outgoing Message OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages OGMs gt 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM Programming Example l S Outgoing Floating Extn Automated Attendant No Busy DND Message No S Gen OGM No 9 o0ol1 2 3 4 5l6 7l8l9 essage No 01 501 100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205 04 02 502 05 Feature Guide 203 1 17 Optional Device Features 204 ee Floating Extn Automated Attendant No Busy DND OGM No No o 1 2 3 41 51 6 7 8 9 Message No 1 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Floating Extension Number 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 2 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message 1 Digit AA Destination Extension Number Dial 0 9 2 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message
345. lowing types of internal calls are available Feature Description amp Reference Intercom Call A call from one extension to another 1 5 3 Intercom Call Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination the recipient can talk to the visitor 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Available Destination The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service on a doorphone port basis Calling from ene Extension Doorphone Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv Vv PS Y vi Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv Vv PS Ring Group Vv Vv Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT vi External Pager TAFAS Vv Y DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no Vv Vv Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Vv Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Vv Vv v Available 36 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 11 1 5 1 Doorphone Destination Day Lunch Break Night PT Programming Manual 720 Doorphone Call Destination Feature Guide 37 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Description Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis This is done by specifying which COS des
346. ls A level 4 user cannot make any international cellular phone long distance calls but can make local calls 134 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features To set TRS Barring as in the example above it is necessary to programme the Denied Code and Exception Code Tables as follows Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 00 Leading number to deny 00xx Leading number for countries to international calls be allowed Level 3 090 Leading number to deny cellular 090xxxx Boss s cellular phone number phone calls XXXX Level 4 0 Leading number to deny long Not required distance calls Programming Example COS Settings Level for Time Mode COS No Level erger Speed Day Lunch Break Night ranting 1 1 1 1 6 1 2 2 2 2 6 1 I 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 501 TRS Barring Level 2 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Override by System Speed Dialling 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling Feature Guide 135 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Flowchart An extension user makes a trunk call Is the call made by System Speed Dialling Checks the TRS Barring level for the time mode of the extension s COS Level 7 W
347. ls It is programmable whether the line is disconnected after the third tone After the call has ended the extension user cannot make further trunk calls until the charge limit has been increased or cleared by an extension assigned as a manager 1 9 2 Budget Management Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation While engaged in an incoming trunk call the dialling of digits can be restricted If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation the line will be disconnected Conditions e During an Unattended Conference Call the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied 1 14 1 2 Conference e When using LCO trunks that do not support Calling Party Control CPC signal detection gt 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection the Trunk to Trunk Call Duration timer should not be disabled as automatic end of call detection cannot be performed 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS Extension CO Line Call Duration Limit 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 166 Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features Extension CO Duration Time 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering Dial Digits PT Programming Manual 472 Ex
348. mation and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode No CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned No Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned Vv Y The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DIL destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DIL destination but routed to the CLI destination Programming Example of DIL Table The table can be programmed for each trunk CLI Destination Trunk No Day Lunch Day Lunch 01 Enable Disable a 101 100 02 Enable Disable S 102 100 20 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night 450 DIL 1 1 Destination Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding trunk VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If a trunk call is received from trunk 01 In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DIL destina
349. ments Paging Group Each paging group consists of extension user groups and external pagers One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 2 2 2 Group 188 User Group 1 Programming Example Extn 100 Extn 101 User Group 2 User Group 3 Extn 102 Extn 103 l P Extn 104 Extn 105 Example Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04 fo Eo Se Extension Extension Extension vii Extension User Group No External Pager No 2 Paging Group No 001 002 003 1 2 01 Vv 02 vi Vv 03 Vv Vv 04 Vv 05 Vv Vv Vv vi Vv w Constituent Feature Guide 1 15 Paging Features I 2 9 7 3 4 Paging Group or 2 9 8 3 4 Paging Group All Setting 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 2 52 9 9 3 4 Paging Group External Pager 641 External Pagers of a Paging Group Conditions Extensions which cannot be paged are PSs SLTs Ringing or busy PTs PTs in Paging Deny mode PTs in Paging DND mode These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page External Pager Priority External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM gt 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Volume Control Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system
350. message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication FWD DND External Internal Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension The Both feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Group FWD External Internal Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call Both distribution group The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Account Code Entry Account Used to enter an account code Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up External Feature Access EFA Used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone Call Park Automatic Park Zone Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically Call Log Used to show the incoming call information Feature Guide 241 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Log in Log out Used to switch between log in and log out mode Hurry up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination Wrap up Used to switch the Wrap up Not Re
351. ming 516 Programming Mode Limitation Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 2 6 Manager Features 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 2 Manager Programming 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming Feature Guide 417 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 3 Password Security Description To maintain system security system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX By giving different users access to different passwords it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform The following types of system passwords are available Password Description Format PT System Password PT for Used to access user level PT programming The specific 4 10 User PT programming items that may be programmed at user digits level can be selected through system programming item System Password PT for Used to access administrator level PT programming All PT Administrator programming settings are available PC System Password PC for Used with the user level programmer code to access user 4 10 User level PC programming The installer can specify which characters system programming settings are available System Password PC for Used with the administrator level programmer code to Administrator access admin
352. mming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 257 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature There are the following types Type Description Call Forwarding Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB Call Forwarding No Reply An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX does CFNR not answer within a preprogrammed time period An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX is busy When the CFB or CFNR has been set the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once When the CFU has been set the net
353. n Features Doorphone Call 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 2 8 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Doorphone Called by Voice 2 11 1 5 1 Doorphone PT Programming Manual 720 Doorphone Call Destination 729 Doorphone Number Reference User Manual References 1 10 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 195 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 2 Door Open Description An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door through COS programming However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied door opener on each door e The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed e Door Open Duration The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period e KX TDA30 only The port of the DPH4 card to which the door opener is connected must be assigned through system programming as a door opener port not a relay port If it is not it may not be possible to open the door while on a doorphone call Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and
354. n Restriction CLIR Feature Guide 365 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Description The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call the following situation will be possible Example Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network USS Hee E E eho eee seeds et eee eee eee eee eee eto e eee Rees eee eS The call is forwarded to the forward Forwarded destination of trunk calls of extension io 1001 2000 which is extension 1001 of PBX 1 i JE E IS The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 released and the call is connected Forward Destination directly to the forward destination of Dials 2000 of Trunk Calls 1001 l extension 2000 EE Je Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 Mabwaeeeeotese ARARA NHN RAAR ANARAN HANAR RR ee ee eee ee eee eset eee eee ee Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 257 Diversion supplementary services e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX
355. n 2 0xxx New Contents e 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out e 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer e 1 17 9 External Sensor e 1 17 10 External Relay Control e 1 27 Hospitality Features es 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear e 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting e 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log e 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection e 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e 1 28 4 Timed Reminder e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 458 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features es 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 459 3 4 Revision History 3 4 8 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 2xxx 460 New Contents 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer 1 17 9 External Sensor 1 17 10 External Relay Control 1 27 Hospitality Features 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents
356. n a PDN to a conference or using the line for an button Unattended Conference Rapid green Anincoming call is arriving at this extension Receiving Hold Recall or automatic callback flashing ringing from a call answered using the SDN button Red on A corresponding SDN extension is The corresponding PDN extension or e onacall another corresponding SDN extension is e holding the line using Exclusive e onacall Call Hold or consultation hold e holding the line using Exclusive D adding a member to a conference Call Hold or consultation hold e using the line for an Unattended e adding a member to a conference Conference e using the line for an Unattended e receiving Hold Recall or automatic Conference callback ringing e receiving an incoming call directed only to the PDN extension e g callback ringing Slow red A call is on hold by a corresponding SDN A call is on hold by the corresponding PDN flashing extension extension or another corresponding SDN extension Rapid red A call is arriving at an Incoming Call The corresponding PDN extension is flashing Distribution ICD group in Ring Distribution receiving an incoming call When multiple calls are on a PDN extension the LED pattern that appears on the corresponding SDN buttons is displayed according to the following priority Receiving an incoming call holding a call gt on a call idle For example if a PDN extension receives an incoming call while o
357. n a call the LEDs on the corresponding SDN extensions will show the incoming call However if an SDN extension is handling a call using the SDN button e g on a call has a call on hold etc the status of that call will be displayed on the SDN button regardless of the call status of the PDN extension Feature Guide 119 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features Example of a Secretary Handling Calls for Multiple Bosses The following example shows the LED patterns of the PDN and SDN buttons of each extension and how calls can be hand led 1 A Call From 111 1111 Arrives at Ext 101 Extn 101 Boss Extn 102 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons CF on CG cof SCT Rapid Green Flashing SDN buttons CT om Extn 103 Co o Extn 102 PDN buttons CC off Co cof C_ on 7 SDN buttons a on Extn 103 Rapid Red Extn 101 Flashing PDN buttons o Q o om SDN buttons CT on Extn 102 SCL Rapid Red Extn 101 Flashing Extn 101 Boss Extn 102 Boss 2 The Call From 111 1111 is Answered by Ext 103 Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons Com OC off TI Red On SDN buttons C_ cor Extn 103 CG ott Extn 102 PDN buttons CG oft Q of LU o 3 The Call From 111 1111 is On Hold by Ext 103 Extn 101 Boss Extn 102 Bos
358. n as Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Unscreened Conditions When an extension is transferring a party to another destination the party will be in consultation hold until they reach the transfer destination Consultation Hold a condition that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Call Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines If Music on Hold is enabled music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred gt 1 13 4 Music on Hold It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party the call will be transferred to the outside party gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code method Access with PBX Code gt 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time the call will be redirected to the Tran
359. n for Original Extension Destination Avaltability Incoming Call Distribution Group Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 Vv Only available when FWD to OPX extension is allowed through COS PS p programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Vv Floating Extension no for SVM Vv VM Group DTMF DPT Vv External Pager TAFAS Vv DISA Vv Only available for incoming trunk calls Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no ve Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Vv Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Vv Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming ka If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block the FWD feature will not function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination Conditions General es FWD for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The extension user can set the FWD feature for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both e FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group Group FWD COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature FWD to Trunk
360. n no 601 group Status Name Sales 10 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 11 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature 12 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Distribution Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is UCD received Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the specified order always starting from the same location Ring All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously 2 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue an outgoing message OGM or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers 48 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 3 VIP Call gt 1 2 2 5 VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be received in priority order 4 Overflow Feature 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group It is also possible to send a busy tone Busy on Busy or disconnect the line 5 In
361. n that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Call Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Flash Time 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Flash Time 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Flash Time 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Flash Time 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port Flash Time 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features External Feature Access 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type 2 13 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Check after EFA PT Programming Manual 417 LCOT Flash Recall Time Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features User Manual References 1 10 4 If a Host PBX is Connected Feature Guide 165 1 11 Conversation Features
362. n user through the handset without interrupting the ongoing conversation 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Conditions e Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA or none of these e OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension e OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types In such cases the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension Calling Called Extension s Call Waiting Mode Extension s OHCA COS on Ge Mode Cancel Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone disabled Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA or disabled or Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone e The notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA and Whisper OHCA are available only when the called extension is having a conversation with another party If the called party is not yet connected with the other party e g still ringing on hold etc the calling extension will hear a ringback tone and will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the call waiting notification 128 Feature Guide 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features es If none of these notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA or Whisper OHCA are set at the called party s extension the caller will hear a reorder tone
363. nation Is the MSN found in the No MSN table Yes The call is ignored Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No Yes CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned Y The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination MSN destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the MSN destination but routed to the CLI destination Feature Guide 25 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1 A table can be programmed for each ISDN BRI port Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table CLI Destination Location No Name Day Lunch si Day Lunch o 123 A Compan Enable Disable 101 100 4567 pany i 02 123 G Compan Enable Disable 102 100 2468 pany S 10 Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding MSN VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration
364. nation assigned to the first destination b If an Intercept Routing Busy destination is not assigned to the first destination and a prerecorded DISA Busy Message is assigned the caller will hear the DISA Busy Message Cl If neither an intercept destination nor a DISA Busy Message is assigned the caller will hear a busy tone Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy DISA Intercept Routing DND If the destination called by the outside party is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available one of the following can be selected through system programming a Busy Tone The caller will hear a busy tone b Intercept DND will redirect the call to the preprogrammed destination on an extension basis c OGM An outgoing message OGM will be sent to the caller The message for DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message OGM which has a DISA floating extension number 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System DISA Intercept Intercept when Destination through DISA sets DND DISA Intercept Routing No Answer If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Intercept time after the call is reached the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature If the intercept destination is not availa
365. nditions e PT Ring off Setting can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled PT users cannot turn incoming call ringing off for their extension Feature Guide 41 1 1 Incoming Call Features 42 e For the S CO G CO L CO ICD Group INTERCOM PDN and SDN buttons one of 30 ring tones can be assigned through personal programming Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 14 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 8 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 8 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Extension Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation PT Ring Off Setting 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Option 6 ICM Tone 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons To distinguish the ringing tones for each CO INTERCOM ICD Group PDN or
366. nds free Hands free Answerback 84 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 1 Predialling Description A display PT user can check and correct the entered number before it is dialled while on hook The call will be initiated after going off hook Conditions e Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System In this case the extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 85 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period the user will hear a reorder tone This operation applies to intercom calls only This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release Conditions e APT PS user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period and then the PT PS returns to idle status automatically However an SLT user hears a reorder tone until he goes on hook e This feature works in one of the following cases When making an intercom call a If the first digit is not dialled within a preprogrammed time period b After a digit is dialled if subseque
367. ne 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 DND Tone Trunk Call Limit Warning Tone 446 Feature Guide 3 3 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default Le 15s Hold Alarm Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 Call Waiting Tone 2 Ring Tone Patterns Default 1s Single Double Triple S Double The duration of a ring tone may vary by country area Feature Guide 447 3 4 Revision History 3 4 Revision History 3 4 1 KX TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3 1xxx New Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting e 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Changed Contents e 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing e 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming e 1 5 3 Intercom Call e 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 9 5 Walking COS e 1 12 1 Call Transfer e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log e 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 20 3 LED Indication e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it e 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 448 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 1 1xxx New Contents e 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call CLIP Number Notification e 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button e 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal Sys
368. ned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA3191 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers A Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Timed Reminder Repeat Counter Timed Reminder Interval Time Timed Reminder Alarm Ringing Duration 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Remote Timed Reminder Remote Wakeup Call Timed Reminder Set Cancel 2 8 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT LCD Time Display 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Timed Reminder Message Day Lunch Break Night 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Timed Reminder Wake up Call Feature Guide 327 1 28 Extension Conirolling Features PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 27 2 Room Status Control User Manual References 1 8 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 328 Feature Guide 1 29 Audible Tone Features 1 29 Audible Tone Features 1 29 1 Dial Tone Description The following distinctive dial tones inform extensions about features activated on their extensions Ea
369. ng Tone Patterns Call from Others Extension Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 9 PDN Delayed Ringing KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 122 Feature Guide 1 7 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features Type Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 9 PDN Delayed Ringing KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Gro
370. ng certain extensions access to various features extensions and trunks depending on the duties appointed to them Many extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number allowing the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions The following features are controlled on a COS basis a b c d e f g h i i k d m n o p q r s t u v w x 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND DND Override 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry gt 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override 1 8 3 Call Monitor 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock gt 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 17 2 Door Open 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Calls 2 2 4 Time Service Time Service Switching 2 2 6 Manager Features 2 3 2 PT Programming gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension SDN Key mode SDN Walking COS and assigning SDN buttons through PT programming K
371. ng is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DID DDI destination but routed to the CLI destination 22 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of DID DDI Table DDI can be programmed as DID CLI s Destination 4 Location No Name Day Lunch den Day Lunch 0001 123 4567 John White Enable Disable wi 105 100 0002 123 2468 Tom Smith Enable Disable SE 102 100 0003 123 456 A company Enable Disable Be 101 101 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Number 451 DID Number 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Name 452 DID Name 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Destination Day Lunch Break Night 453 DID Destination Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID DDI table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding DID DDI number VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration gt 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If the DID DDI number is 123 4567 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 0001 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mo
372. ng together for calls An employee who is not in the office but is still available to answer calls can receive calls to an ICD Group Cellular ICD Group i H i I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 T 4 TE PS 4 Bie PS 3 Cellular Phone XDP Parallel The extension registered first in an ICD Group can programme the Forward settings for trunk calls to up to 4 virtual PSs through PT programming Using this feature an extension user can assign his cellular phone to ring with his PT so that he can easily receive trunk calls even when not at his desk Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version Feature Guide 55 1 2 Receiving Group Features 56 e For this feature to be activated the following conditions must be met Avvirtual PS is assigned as a member of the ICD Group 1 25 6 Virtual PS The forwarding type of the virtual PS is set to All Calls gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD The forwarding destination is an outside party including an extension at another PBX in the network FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming for the virtual PSs The distribution method for the ICD Group is set to Ring gt 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Upto 4 virtual PSs can be assigned to a single ICD Group If more than 4 are assigned the 4 virtu
373. nging Tone Type Number for Time Service 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service PT Programming Manual 101 Time Service Switching Mode 102 Time Service Starting Time 514 Time Service Manual Switching Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 3 Tenant Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 8 10 Checking the Time Service Status 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control Feature Guide 409 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 5 Operator Features 410 Description Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution ICD group can be designated as an operator This PBX supports the following types of operators Type Description PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode day lunch break night Tenant operator An extension or incoming call
374. ngs up b the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit Default 120 seconds Cl the recording space for the SVM card reaches the limit In cases b and c the caller will hear a notification tone and the line will be disconnected New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when a the total recording time or number of voice messages for the SVM card exceeds the limit b the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit c the destination of a call has been changed more than once d the desired message box is already in use by another user e acallis received at an ICD Group and the message box of the first extension assigned to that group is not available or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group Recording Greeting Messages If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the card is already full the user will hear a reorder tone Display Lock A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user s information from being viewed and voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Incoming Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialling number display are also locked An extension personal identification number PIN 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN is required to lock unlock the display SVM Remote Acc
375. nit itself This is known as temporary registration If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS all calls to that extension number will be forwarded to the assigned destination Using this setting to forward calls to outside destinations or destinations at another PBX allows those destinations to receive calls as if they were within the PBX In addition depending on system programming the forward destination can use some of the features of the PBX This can be especially useful for a cellular phone user who can use his cellular phone as if it were his extension when he is away from his desk Example pases E EE l Outside Caller wee ee ee e rm TIE Line Network TIE Line tae eee Dials 201 3 ay M Virtual PS 1 l fee PS 2 IS Extn 201 Extn 202 Fwd to outside Fwd to destination i destination at other PBX i The following features can be accessed using this method Feature Description amp Reference Outside Destinations in A virtual PS allows calls to an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution to be answered by outside destinations or extensions at another Group PBX 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Network ICD Group Using virtual PSs in an ICD Group up to 4 other PBXs can be called at the same time 1 30 6 Network ICD Group Feature Guide 301 1 25 Portable Station PS Features
376. nitor Display gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI Date and time 601 Sales Section Floating extension number name of incoming call distribution group Waiting Calls Now 00006 The number of queuing calls Max Waiting Time 05 10 The longest queuing time EXIT LOG SPRVS Since 29 JAN 09 10AM Monitoring starting date and time Total Calls 00996 Total number of incoming calls gt Overflow Calls 00131 Total number of overflowed calls Lost Calls 00039 The number of lost calls Average Waiting 02 12 Average queuing time EXIT CLEAR y lt Log in Log out Monitor Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI 601 Sales Section Waiting Calls Now 00006 W o o o a Max Waiting Time 05 10 With oOo HEH a4 EH a gt a ad Q Q a Q E J i 1 a4 a a Q a J EXIT a 1a r a J a Ia E J Log in Log out Monitor Log in Log out Remote Control DSS buttons of the incoming call gt Pressing the button changes distribution group members show the status as follows their status Light pattern Status Status Light pattern Green on Log in Ready Log out Red on Slow Green Flashing Log in Not Ready iid Log in Ready Green on Red on Log out Off Extension in another incoming call distribution group Feature Guide 67 1 2 Receiving Group Features 68 Conditions Available Extension
377. nouncement 173 Call Transfer Unscreened gt Call Transfer without Announcement 173 Call Waiting 43 Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID 43 Call Waiting Tone 130 Callback Busy Automatic Camp on 124 CallerID 225 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 28 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 225 254 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP by QSIG 364 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 254 Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP by QSIG 364 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 172 Capacity of System Resources 440 Carrier Access Code Special 100 CCBS by QSIG gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber by QSIG 370 CCBS gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 266 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY 390 Cellular Phone XDP Parallel 55 Centralised Voice Mail 376 Centrex Service ISDN 251 CF by ISDN P MP gt Call Forwarding by ISDN P MP 258 CF by ISDN P P gt Call Forwarding by ISDN P P 260 CF by QSIG gt Call Forwarding by QSIG 366 Charge Management Call 313 Charge Services Call 312 Circular Hunting 45 Class of Service COS 394 CLI gt Calling Line Identification Distribution 28 CLIP by QSIG gt Calling Line Identification Presentation by QSIG 364 CLIP gt Calling Line Identification Presentation 225 254 CLIR gt Calling Line Identification Restriction 254 364 CNIP by QSIG gt Calling
378. ns e When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold e CONF Conference Button For a PT which does not have the CONF button a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button es Unattended Conference Call Duration The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers Callback Start Timer Warning Tone Start Timer Disconnect Timer These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events 1 When the unattended conference is established the Callback Start Timer will begin 2 When the Callback Start timer expires the Unattended Conference originator s extension will start to receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins 3 When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires the remaining parties of the conference will start to hear a warning tone the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference originator s extension and the Disconnect Timer begins 4 When the disconnect Timer expires the conference is disconnected If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected all timers are cleared e Fora Conference With Six or More Parties The EECHO or ECHO card is required Also the echo cancelling function should be enabled through system programming Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 3 ECH
379. ns e This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS MUTE button User Manual References 1 4 6 Mute 158 Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 4 Headset Operation Description This PBX allows the use of headset compatible PTs A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset For connection and operation refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset This feature is also known as Handset Headset Selection Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional headset If headset mode is on pressing the SP PHONE button activates the headset not the built in speaker To set headset mode on a DPT use personal programming Headset Operation or press the Headset button To set headset mode on an APT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Headset Button A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as a Headset button It is possible to assign a Headset button to a flexible button on an APT but the button will not function Answer Release Button A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button Such buttons are useful for headset operation It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button While hearing the Call Waiting tone during a conversation pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line
380. ns can be customised on an extension Type Description FWD DND for Extension FWD DND Internal Works for incoming intercom calls FWD DND External Works for incoming trunk calls FWD DND Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status The FWD DND button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Slow red flashing DND on Off FWD DND off The functions assigned to the on and flashing patterns can be changed through system programming Group FWD Button Types The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension Type Description FWD for Incoming Call Group FWD Internal Works for incoming intercom calls Distribution Group Group FWD External Works for incoming trunk calls Group FWD Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Off FWD off 76 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features FWD DND Setting by Fixed FWD DND button Pressing the fixed FWD DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for FWD DND FWD DND for trunk calls The FWD DND status for trunk calls to that extension
381. nt digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension First Digit Dial Extension Inter digit Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Handset Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free PT Programming Manual None 86 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user Conditions Extension Number Name Assignment Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions The assigned number and name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls DSS Button It is possible to access another extension with one touch by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection DSS button A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button Call Directory Extension Dialling A display PT user can make a call by selecting one of the stored names on the display Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming Alternate Receiving Ring Voice If a user selects voice calling the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone Denying voice calling can also be selected Alternate Calling Ring Voice A caller can change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice temporarily
382. ntascanansieaiaies 191 OC SU UY EE 191 Optional Device Features acca ccsccsesecsccc cc cassieteccncceccscasacedevaansteatextsceasesdetesinendeceeradecnenzess 194 Doorphone Cc csc tc cca a tet celts eelere he 194 DOS ars sg ac ae eed ee cas ee eee 196 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAG EE 197 Background Music BGM E 198 Outgoing Message OM 200 Direct Inward System Access DIANA 203 Automatic Fax ELE 213 Built in Simplified Voice Message VM 215 EXT CRIA SISO cerne 221 External Relay E 223 Caller ID FG atures xia sisiessssnsecestaccassscascnccccadensssescceseeecsecevesetccercessceitosscessndedcescenedcdetvaats 225 CANN Wp sas aes ee nes eee eho da es oe eee eee see ee 225 ncomingieall Log E 230 MSS ae TT 233 Message ie Te SE 233 PD SSIES Eegeregie tee 236 Proprietary Telephone PT Features eecccccesssesseeeeeeseeeeneenneneeeeeeensneeseeeeeeeeess 238 ak RE 238 Flexible ButtONS siinon R ebe 241 RS en EE 244 Re Elte Le e EE 247 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features ccsssecsssseeeeees 249 Integrated Services Digital Network GDN 249 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN GUMMAPN A 249 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP ccccsceeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeseneeesseeeeessaeeeees 254 Advice of Charge OC 257 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN PMP 258 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN DP 260 Call Hold HOLD by IDN 262 Call Transfer
383. nted Guedes 115 eler gl EI 117 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Features 118 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension 118 Busy Line Busy Party Features csccccssseeecessseeseeeseeneeeesseeeeeesseneeseesseeeeeesseneeeeess 124 Automatic Callback Busy CAmp O0 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeesescnntaeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 Executive BUSY Override ss a crcesatcntcl sete srandasdndcasacctiansauzetentatoneden mene derintenaseemenadece 125 Call el e E 126 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 128 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension GUMMAPNY A 128 Call Waiting Le TEE 130 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA nnt 131 Whisper QHGA EE E E AE E E eet eenegen ie 132 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features ccccesssssseeeeeeeeeeneees 133 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Gaming 133 Budget Management csccvceniveacicd sot sdtcesiteurudascineteiiancasmleeuix eacieenetuadsentQeerieensilendtieeceameends 141 Extension Dial Locke 142 IERT NC 143 lee 145 Verification Code Entry E 147 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features ssssssussnseennuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 150 Automatic Route Selection AS 150 Conversation Features sek EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEER KEE KEE KEREN EEN 156 Hands free Operation EE 156 Otf hook Monto eonna reor aran A R RTA a RAA a AEE A R 157 MIER ees
384. ocol 269 ISDN gt Integrated Services Digital Network 249 Itemised Biling Code 154 L Last Number Redial 111 LCS gt Live Call Screening 287 LED Indication 119 244 Line Preference Override 102 Line Preference Incoming 80 Line Preference Outgoing 102 Live Call Screening LCS 287 Local Alarm Information 436 Lock Display 113 218 230 Lock Extension Dial 142 Lock Extension PIN 322 Lock Remote Extension Dial 142 Log in Log out 64 Log in Log out Monitor 65 M Making Calls with an SDN Button 118 Malicious Call Identification MCID 265 Manager Features 411 Manual Queue Redirection 58 MOD gt Malicious Call Identification 265 Memory Dialling Features 106 Message Features 233 Message Waiting 233 Message Absent 236 Message Outgoing OGM 200 Message Printing 311 Monitor Call 126 MSN gt Multiple Subscriber Number Ringing Service 25 Multiple FWD 72 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 25 Multiple VPSs_ 378 Music on Hold 182 Music Source Assignment 182 Music Background BGM 198 Mute 158 N NDSS gt Network Direct Station Selection 371 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 371 Network ICD Group 379 Networking Features 333 No Line Preference 80 102 Numbering Fixed Flexible 423 Index O Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 131 Off hook Monitor 157 OGM gt Outgoing Message 200 OHCA gt Off hook Call Announcement 131 OHCA Whisper 132 One to
385. of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Remote Operation by Other Extension 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN Feature Guide 145 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features PT Programming Manual 005 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting 146 Feature Guide 1 9 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Description An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension to change the TRS Barring level gt 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes A verification code personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly re
386. ogramming to automatically activate for the following types of trunk to trunk call to enable detection of the end of the call When a trunk call is forwarded to another trunk When a trunk call is transferred to another trunk When a trunk call to an incoming call distribution group is answered by an outside destination member Before the call is made the PBX confirms that a DISA port is available If no DISA ports are available the call is not routed to a trunk For transferred calls or calls to an ICD Group if the DISA port has become unavailable when the trunk to trunk conversation is actually established the call is established without DISA When using this feature the Trunk to Trunk Call Limitation timer should be enabled In addition prolonging the call through DTMF signalling is not available DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination An outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension at the PBX by pressing extension number if DISA is connected by the Automatic DISA Activation feature This feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version is required to use this feature DISA security mode should be set to No Security or Trunk Security Ifthe called extension does not answer is busy or is in DND mo
387. ol the conversation using the following buttons Pressing the other buttons during the conversation will be ignored Button Function DSS Establishes a conversation with the corresponding member extension or remove the extension from the conversation Feature Guide 191 1 16 Broadcasting Features 192 Button Function CONF Conference Establishes a conversation with the current members in the order assigned in the broadcasting group Pressing this button again will add the next available member in the group to the conversation TRANSFER Removes the member who joined the conversation last The member can still listen to the announcement FLASH RECALL Flash Recall Removes the member who joined the conversation last The member mode will be disconnected from the broadcasting call and hear a reorder tone SP PHONE Enables a hands free conversation A member extension can inform the caller that he wants to speak or join the conversation by sending a notification The caller will hear a notification tone and the requesting extension s information will be shown on the display for five seconds Conditions Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card Only PTs that are permitted by COS programming can originate broadcasting calls Ring Duration A system timer is available to limit the call ring duration at the members When this limit is reached members telephones will stop ringin
388. oming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions agents are busy with calls When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions calls enter a queue 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 Distribution Method One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Distribution UCD Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is received Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group starting at the extension after the extension that received the last call Extn Extn gt Extn gt Extn o Starts searching from Received the last call extn B Skips extn A Depending on system programming calls can be directed to the longest idle extension This is known as Automatic Call Distribution ACD Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group ist Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Extn Extn Extn Extn A B Cc D Always starts searching from the first assigned extension Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed
389. on or incoming call distribution group Status of the called extension 123 Busy The number and name of the optional device Door 02 1st Door The dialled telephone number 1234567890 The received call information The first line message can be a Caller s name ABC Company either a c or e at each b 12345678 extension through system Callers number Line 001 Sales programming c Trunk number name gt 102 Mike d Original Destination if the call is forwarded p e DDI DID MSN name or number SEENEN Call charge fee during a trunk call 12 35 The currency position of the currency symbol and the decimal point are programmable Call duration during a trunk call Line 001 11 02 28 Conditions Multilingual Display Each extension can select its display language through personal programming Display Language Selection Display Contrast It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming Display Contrast Selection This is available only for DPTs Display Backlight Each extension can select its display backlight on or off through personal programming Display Backlight Selection This is available for the KX T7633 KX T7636 and IP PTs Characters name or digits number exceeding the display s size limitation are not displayed In this case information which have been programmed is hidden but not altered Programming Manual References PC Prog
390. on 100 123 456 Extn 101 The Inter digit time expired after receiving 6 The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table So the call is routed to extension 101 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 30 1 1 Slot DID Card Property 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Receiving Dial Inter digit Timer DDI DID 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table A Port Settings DDI DID TIE MSN Distribution Method DDI DID TIE MSN Remove Digit DDI DID TIE MSN Additional Dial 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table PT Programming Manual 421 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 451 DID Number 452 DID Name 453 DID Destination Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 24 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN BRI Basic Rate Interface line call with an MSN to a preprogrammed destination One ISDN BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs Each MSN has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Point to multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Desti
391. on Port DPT Type Type for DPT or S Hybrid port 601 Terminal Device Assignment 2 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port DPT Type VM Unit No for DPT or S Hybrid port 2 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port DPT Type VM Port No for DPT or S Hybrid port Programming Example of VM DTMF Group Floating Extension No of VM DTMF Extension Group Service Port Connected to Group No No Name Mode VPS Port i 1 2 1 300 Company C AA 301 302 2 400 Company D VM 401 402 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Example of VM DPT Group Floating Extension No Group Name 2 VM DPT Group No 1 500 Company A 2 200 Company B 1 2 9 17 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Floating Extension No 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 2 2 9 17 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Group Name Incoming Calls to VM Group When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number In this case the FWD and DND settings 1 3 1 Call Feature Guide 275 1 24 Voice Mail Features 276 Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for each extension port are disregarded It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming If the queuing is disabled through syst
392. on for that extension monitoring will be reactivated To completely remove monitoring of an extension the registration data must also be deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table at each monitor PBX The monitor destination of each NDSS button is determined by the registration information for a particular index number in this table Therefore if the registration information for an index number is changed for example the Network Extension Number assigned to Index No 001 in the example above is changed from 2001 to 4002 any NDSS buttons that have been set for that extension will automatically point to the new monitor destination Conditions Hardware Requirements The PLMPR PMPR PSMPR software file version of all PBXs in the network must be 2 0xxx or later The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in all PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored PBXs with Network ID 0 can use the standard KX TDA0820 or KX TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade If using an IP GW4E card KX TDA0484 the firmware not LPR of the card must be version 1 2 or later If using a PRI23 card KX TDA0290 the LPR software of the card must be version 1 009 or later Each of Network PBX IDs 1 8 can only be assigned to one PBX within a network Assigning the same Network PBX ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems It is only possib
393. on number of any extension for example the PBX operator at the monitor PBX as a Network Operator extension for that IP GW card Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Example VoIP Network PBX 1 PBX 2 Ji Network IS ech ID 1 EN 4001 NDSS Ss g 4001 NDSS 7 Idle O Idle Busy IP Network 4 Busy PBX 3 PBX 4 Network 5 ID 2 GEN ani 4001 Idle gt Busy Sg Mixed Network When using the NDSS feature over a mixed network containing both VoIP portions and ISDN line portions it is possible to set whether status information will be transferred between VoIP and ISDN cards within each PBX For example if the monitor PBX is on a VoIP network and monitored PBXs are on an ISDN network the PBX that acts as a gateway between the VoIP and ISDN networks must have this setting enabled for ISDN to VoIP Network Monitor Extension Registration Monitor PBX Register the extensions attached to other PBXs that will be monitored A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered Only extensions that have been registered here can be assigned to NDSS buttons 2 15 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Network Extension No Network Monitor Extensions Table Index No Network Extn No Network Extn Name 001 2001 Branch 1 T Durden 002 2002 Branch 1 M Singer 003 4001 Branch 2 R Paulson 250 When using the PBX Access Code numbering
394. on which the Prime Line is assigned 2 The call arriving at the INTERCOM button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 Incoming Preferred Line 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 Incoming Preferred Line PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a Call ringing at any other extension The following types are available Type Picking up Call Type Directed A specified extension s call Group A call within a specified call pickup group Call Pickup Deny Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible Conditions Call Pickup applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls Internal Call Block An extension that is restricted by COS from calling certain extensions 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions Directed Call Pickup A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button This feature is only available when 1 the user s extension is allowed to use this feature through COS programming 2 DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution ICD groups have this feature enabled thr
395. one company as the host PBX Therefore only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 1 8 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Host PBX Access Code 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options ARS Dial PT Programming Manual 471 Host PBX Access Code Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 99 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Description If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming is required every time a trunk call is made without using ARS A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Special Carrier Access code and the subsequent digits 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Conditions e TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code gt 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS e If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately these codes cannot be assigned together as one code 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code
396. onsole Flexible Button Pair Extension PT Programming Manual 007 DSS Console Paired Telephone User Manual References 1 12 1 Using the Same Settings as Your Previous Extension Walking Extension 326 Feature Guide 1 28 Extension Controlling Features 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Description An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time to act as a wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily If the user answers the alarm call a prerecorded voice message will be heard If a message is not assigned a special dial tone dial tone 3 will be heard Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways e By the extension user from his own extension e Remotely by the hotel operator Remote Wake up Call Conditions Be sure that the PBX clock works e Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time Setting a new reminder clears the previous reminder If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same extension the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective e Programmable Time The Alarm Ringing Duration time the number of alarm repeat times and intervals are programmable through system programming e To use the voice message feature The MSG card is required and the message must be recorded An extension assigned as the manager can record messages 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM A different message can be assig
397. ort Connection 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port Connection 2 7 34 1 1 Slot IP GW Port Connection 2 7 38 1 1 Slot IP Extension Port Connection 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Idle Line Access Local Access Trunk Group Access Single CO Line Access 2 8 12 2 7 2 Class of Service External Call Block 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main Line Hunting Order 2 9 2 3 1 2 Trunk Group Local Access Priority 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 2 14 1 8 1 System Settings ARS Mode 2 16 1 10 1 CO Line Settings CO Name PT Programming Manual 400 LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 401 LCOT BRI Trunk Name 409 LCOT BRI Trunk Number Reference 500 Trunk Group Number 104 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 105 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 Memory Dial
398. ortable Station Extension Settings Main Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 604 Extension Intercept Destination When the original destination is The Available Intercept Destination is e Wired Extension PT SLT T1 OPX The destination assigned to the original extension e PS 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy 604 Extension Intercept Destination 30 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features When the original destination is The Available Intercept Destination is ICD Group The ICD Group Overflow destination assigned to the group gt 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow No Answer Time out amp Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration VM Group DTMF DPT The destination assigned to the first extension of the VM group DISA If all DISA ports are busy when a call i
399. orts of the VPS are busy FWD EXT RBT FWD to The PBX is calling an extension other than the one 8 extension ringback tone dialled FWD or Idle Extension Hunting gt 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting may be assigned by the called extension Confirm confirmation The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has 9 tone been successfully set or cancelled e g Message Waiting on the extension Disconnect The caller has hung up 9 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal Ringback Tone VM DTMF Status Signal Busy Tone VM DTMF Status Signal Reorder Tone Feature Guide 281 1 24 Voice Mail Features 282 VM DTMF Status Signal DND tone VM DTMF Status Signal Answer VM DTMF Status Signal Confirm VM DTMF Status Signal Disconnect VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to VM Ringback Tone VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to VM Busy Tone VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Example Anincoming call reaches the VPS The VPS greets the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic If you know the extension number of the person you wish PBX Transfer The caller dials the extension number extn 102 The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the 1 PBX Jr Sent 2 BEE i T Ifthe extension is not available the PBX sends i Busy DTMF status signal of the extension busy status to y Status the
400. ough system programming and 3 the light pattern of DSS buttons for incoming calls to extensions or ICD groups is set to On or Flash through system programming The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or incoming call distribution group can be programmed through system programming Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is flashing red Group Call Pickup A specified number of call pickup groups can be created each of which consist of extension user groups One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups 2 2 2 Group Example Extension User Group 4 et IE Extn 106 Extn 107 Extension User Group 3 Se Extn 104 Extn 105 Extension User Group 2 el d Extension User Group 1 T Extn 100 Extn 101 Feature Guide 81 1 4 Answering Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Group Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR Call Pickup by DSS 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 DSS Key DSS Key mode for Incoming Call DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for ICD Group Call 2 9 5 8 3 Call Pickup Group 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny 2 10 10
401. ouncement over the built in speaker For users in Germany and Austria only Although the APT will ring for incoming calls the SLT will not ring For users in other countries areas Both the APT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls and the PBX cannot refuse calls arriving at the SLT DPT SLT It is programmable whether to have the DPT and SLT in either parallel or XDP mode Regardless of the mode the SLT can be connected directly to the XDP port of the DPT or to a modular T adapter with the DPT When in parallel mode it is programmable whether the SLT rings for incoming calls Ring on Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback or voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 1 5 3 Intercom Call Ring off Only the PT rings However the SLT can answer the call Both telephones cannot engage in calls simultaneously If one telephone goes off hook while the other is on a call the call is switched to the former The call is not switched in the following cases a While being monitored by another extension 1 8 3 Call Monitor b While receiving OHCA 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA c During a Conference call 1 14 1 Conference Features d While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Feature Guide 169
402. out 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 Wrap up Timer 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log out 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log out 2 17 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Log in Log out PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 9 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up 66 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Description An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor Supervisor extension can monitor and control each member s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6 line display PT Feature Description Incoming Call Queue Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display Log in Log out Monitor and Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the log in log out Remote Control status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button Example lt Incoming Call Queue Mo
403. p FWD Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls or intercom calls but not both the FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for trunk calls only pressing the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button or the Group FWD Both button will be ignored When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously pressing the button changes the settings as follows gt FWD gt DND gt Off A FWD DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD DND Cycle Switch mode and the mode cannot be changed Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features FWD DND Set Cancel Call from CO amp Extension FWD DND Set Cancel Call from CO FWD DND Set Cancel Call from Extension Group FWD Set Cancel Call from CO amp Extension Group FWD Set Cancel Call from CO Feature Guide 77 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Group FWD Get Cancel Call from Extension 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Fwd DND Fwd LED PT Fwd DND DND LED PT Fwd DND Fwd DND key mode when Idle 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings FWD DND Reference 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD Both Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD External
404. p Name 2 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 4 632 Maximum Number of Agents 5 628 Queuing Call Capacity 8 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 7 626 Overflow Time 8 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 627 Destination When All Busy 9 The tenant number is required to determine the time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service and the music source for Music on Hold for each group Feature Guide 47 1 2 Receiving Group Features Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1 Q gt Overflow Feature ip ee a Sends a busy tone Busy on Busy or b Redirects to the overflow destination D Queuing Feature _ gt Five calls are waiting in a queue gt E Manual Queue Redirection 10 Se The longest waiting call in a queue Group Call Distribution 3 can be redirected to the overflow Calls are distributed by the destination by pressing the Hurry up assigned method button The button shows the Hurry Only three extensions up status agents can answer the call for Busy on Busy Supervisor Extension Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn 100 101 102 103 104 105 105 Monitors or controls the Incoming Call Log in Log out incoming call distribution Distribution Group tat Floating extensio
405. pecified relay turns on for a preprogrammed length of time When this timer expires the relay turns off automatically This gives the PBX simple control over other equipment allowing an extension user to for example activate an alarm from his extension If the relay cannot be accessed for example because use is not permitted by COS or the port is not in service a reorder tone will be heard at the extension Conditions e Hardware Requirement KX TDASO An external relay device and DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An external relay device OPB card and EIO card e KX TDA30 only The port of the DPH4 card to which the relay is connected must be assigned through system programming as a relay port not a door opener port e Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it e Each external relay port has a COS assigned This and the COS of an extension determine the extension users who can use External Relay Control e The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system programming e Ifthe same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on the timer for that relay is reset Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card KX TDA3161 2 5 2 DPH2 Card KX TDA3162 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors
406. pplementary service e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN QSIG port basis e Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer 368 Feature Guide 1 30 Networking Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 369 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Description If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 366 Call completion supplementary services e This feature is available under the following conditions a The caller s PBX is capable of using CCBS b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS e
407. programming Paging DND When DND gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND is set for incoming calls it is programmable whether your extension receives paging through system programming Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Group Paging Group Paging Answer Paging Deny Get Cancel 2 8 17 2 9 System Options gt Option 1 PT Fwd DND Paging to DND Extension Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer 2 8 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Paging EPG 1 External Pager 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Paging EPG External Pager KX TDA30 only Paging Paging Level from PT Speaker 2 9 7 8 4 Paging Group 2 9 8 3 4 Paging Group All Setting 2 9 9 3 4 Paging Group External Pager 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Paging Deny PT Programming Manual Feature Guide 189 1 15 Paging Features 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 641 External Pagers of a Paging Group Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 7 1 Paging 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement 190 Feature Guide 1 16 Broadcasting Features 1 16 Broadcasting Features 1 16 1 Broadcasting Description A PT user can call multiple parties assigned as member
408. ption Port Mode Configuration Type Basic Rate Interface BRI Provides two 64 kbps B channels _ Trunk Point to Point Point for communication and one 16 Extension to multipoint D ch for signalling 2B GC SEENEN QSIG Master Point to Point l Slave 1 Primary Rate Interface Provides thirty or twenty three 64 Trunk QSIG Point to Point PRI kbps B channels for Master Slave communication and one 64 kbps D Extension channel for signalling 30B Di 23B D i 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Main Port Type 2 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Main Port Type 3 For BRI only 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network Access Mode 426 BRI Configuration Note Point to Point P P One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port Point to multipoint P MP A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port Feature Guide 249 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 250 2 ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network Service Description amp Reference Direct Dialling In DDI Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination P P only 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Multiple Subscriber Number MSN One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs for routing incoming calls P MP only
409. r VM Trunk Group 2 16 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No 2 16 6 10 4 MSN Table Main Tenant Number Feature Guide 289 1 24 Voice Mail Features VM Trunk Group No PT Programming Manual 201 Transfer Recall Time Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering User Manual References 1 10 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming 290 Feature Guide 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Description This PBX supports the connection of a PS e g KX TCA255 KX TD7690 It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT Conditions General The PS registration is required through the system programming To avoid unexpected registration to another PBX the Personal Identification Number PIN for the PBX is necessary to register a PS The registration can be cancelled A PS can only be assigned an extension number of 4 digits or less Handover Even if a PS user moves during a conversation the PS will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call Handover Handover is available in any of the following cases a During a conversation with an extension or outside party b While a call is ringing at the PS c Wh
410. r PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 9 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Description When an extension user cannot answer calls e g he is busy or not at his desk it is possible to forward or refuse calls using the following features 1 Call Forwarding FWD 2 Do Not Disturb DND 1 FWD Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 2 DND Callers to an extension will hear a tone to inform them that the extension user is not available gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 3 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button The FWD DND fixed button or a customised flexible button can display the FWD DND setting status of the extension gt 1 3 1 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Conditions e FWD and DND are set for intercom calls including doorphone calls and trunk calls including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold separately Feature Guide 69 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Des
411. r Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version is required to use this feature e Each outgoing message OGM can be assigned a name through system programming for programming reference 2 11 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Name 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA3191 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers A Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Delayed Answer Timer DISA Mute amp OGM Start Timer after Answering Feature Guide 211 1 17 Optional Device Features DISA No Dial Intercept Timer DISA 2nd Dial Timer for AA DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night DISA Disconnect Timer after Intercept DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Counter DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Time DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message DISA Reorder Tone Duration 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Accept the Call from DISA 2 9 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Tone Detection DISA Tone Detection Silence Tone Detection DISA Tone Detection Continuous Tone Detection D
412. r deny this feature through COS programming Once this feature is set the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed unless a PS changes the setting The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on a call however they are available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the wired telephone is on a call Executive Busy Override 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Whisper OHCA gt 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA CCBS gt 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Most of the extension data e g extension number extension name of the wired telephone is used for its PS as well However the PS has its own extension data for the following Feature Guide 1 25 Portable Station PS Features Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Hot Line Setting gt 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer 1 13 2 Call Park Display Language 1 20 4 Display Information ISDN Bearer Mode gt 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Flexible Button Assignment 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Note To change the setting of the extens
413. r the PC or printer If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LF 2 17 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication NL Code 800 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code b Baud Rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer 2 17 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication Baud Rate 800 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features c Word Length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character 2 17 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication Word Length 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length d Parity Bit A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer 2 17 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication Parity Bit 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit e Stop Bit Length A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer gt 2 17 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication Stop Bit 800 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length e Ifa callis transferred to an ICD group or PDN extension using Automatic Transfer the condition code TR will not be recorded on SMDR gt 1 12 1 Call Transfer e Host PBX
414. ramming Manual 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 5 PT Feature Access No 1 8 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 Display Language Option 5 Incoming Call Display Feature Guide 247 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 248 Option 5 Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 Display Language Option 5 Incoming Call Display Option 5 Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point Charge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position 2 16 1 10 1 CO Line Settings CO Name PT Programming Manual 130 Decimal Point Position for Currency 131 Currency User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Description ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network ISDN transmits voice data and image in digital format ISDN lines if available can be connected to public line trunk private line QSIG or ISDN terminal devices extension 1 ISDN Interface and Configuration Interface Type Descri
415. ramming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 45 1 2 Portable Station PT Programming Manual 690 PS Registration 691 PS Termination 692 Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration Feature Guide References 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 292 Feature Guide 1 25 Portable Station PS Features 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Description A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls Each group has a floating extension number and name One PS can belong to multiple groups Programming Example PS Ring Group 01 PS Ring Group 02 PS Ring Group 03 Floating Extn No 301 302 303 Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Sales 3 ae OE SE oe Caller s Name Number Caller s Name Number PSO1 Vv PS02 V PS03 V PS04 V V PS05 Vv PS06 V PS07 Vv Y Constituent PS Ring Group 1 Floating Extn No 301 Name Sales 1 Gem PS03 PS02 Conditions e PS Ring Group PS Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 2 PS04 PS05 A maximum of 32 groups can be created PS06 Feature Guide 293 1 25 Portable Station PS Features e Available PS The KX TD7580 KX TCA155 KX TCA255 KX TD7680 and KX TD7690 can join PS ring groups e Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which the PS joins The display information can be selected on a PS r
416. ransfer Outgoing Message OGM Records and plays back outgoing Not required messages OGMs 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM Time Service Switches the time mode day lunch break Not required night manually 2 2 4 Time Service Feature Guide 411 2 2 System Configuration Software 412 a Manager Feature Description amp Reference Password BGM External Sets the External BGM on and off Not required 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Trunk Busy Out Clear Clears the Busy Out status of a trunk Not required 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out NDSS Monitor Release Removes the monitor function from an Not required NDSS button 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e Manager Password One manager password can be assigned per PBX Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature Manager 2 17 1 11 1 Main Password Manager Pas
417. rces User Manual References 1 7 3 Making an Announcement and Having a Multiple Party Conversation Broadcasting Feature Guide 193 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 Optional Device Features 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 194 Description It is possible to connect doorphones directly to the PBX When a visitor presses the call button on a doorphone the doorphone calls a preprogrammed destination extension or outside party In addition extension users can dial the preset number of a doorphone to call that doorphone Conditions Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An optional doorphone and a DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An optional doorphone the OPB card and DPH card Each doorphone port can only be assigned to one tenant The Time Table day lunch break night of the tenant applies 2 2 4 Time Service Call Destination The incoming doorphone call destination s can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night for each doorphone port Destinations can be selected 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Ring Duration If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ringing stops and the call is cancelled Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by a system timer If
418. re Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table Feature Guide 271 1 23 T1 Line Service Features 1 23 T1 Line Service Features 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Description The T1 line carries twenty four 64 kbps voice channels at 1 5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 1 Channel Type LCOT GCOT DID TIE OPX The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 T1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table 1 2 3 4 5 Channel Type TIE DID DIL OPX ANI LCOT Vv GCOT Y DID Vv Vv Vv TIE E amp M Vv Vv Vv Y OPX Y w Available Explanation Gi ech Feature Description 1 TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 2 Direct Inward Dialling Refer to the DID feature 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 Direct In Line DIL Refer to the DIL feature 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 272 Feature Guide 1 23 T1 Line Service Features Number in the Table Feature Description
419. rences 2 2 6 Manager Features User Manual References 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Description Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user dialled number before the number is dialled out allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access certain features eg access codes seizing idles lines etc When a pause is needed pauses must be inserted manually pressing the PAUSE button in all cases except for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits a Host PBX Access code gt 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX b Special Carrier Access code gt 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code c Second Dial Tone Waiting code Conditions e The Pause time is programmable for each trunk e Pauses can be stored in Memory Dialling e When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code e ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Pause
420. ring a conversation an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on Consultation Hold The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and or connect the original party with the third party Conditions e Consultation Hold a condition that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Call Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines e When the extension user is having a conversation with one party the other party is in consultation hold User Manual References 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting Feature Guide 181 1 13 Holding Features 1 13 4 Music on Hold Description Music can be played to a party that has been put on hold The following music sources are available a Internal music source b External music source c Cyclic tone Music Source Assignment KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 BGM1 BGM2 and cyclic tone can be selected as Music on Hold through system programming External music port 1 is assigned to BGM 1 It is possible to select whether external music port 2 internal music source 1 or internal music source 2 is assigned to BGM2 Having two external music ports for example
421. rlap is selected the PBX sends each dialled digit individually When En bloc is selected the PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN CO ISDN Outgoing Call Type 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting ISDN Outgoing Call Type In En bloc mode the PBX recognises that the user is finished dialling when the key is pressed programmable 2 8 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode the dialled number is a preprogrammed telephone number 2 12 7 6 7 Dialling Plan the inter digit timer expires 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Extension Number An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Network Type BRI only Each BRI port can be set to the requirements of each country area 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network Network Type 420 BRI Network Type L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode BRI only The active mode of Layer 1 L1 and the data link mode of Layer 2 L2 can be selected individually Permanent or Call by Call on an ISDN port basis 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Network L1 Mo
422. rogramming Manual 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer 2 9 11 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table PT Programming Manual 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 626 Overflow Time 627 Destination When All Busy 628 Queuing Call Capacity 632 Maximum Number of Agents 62 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Feature Guide 63 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 7 Description Log in Log out Members of an incoming call distribution group can join Log in or leave Log out the group manually They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls Wrap up While logged in amember extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the previous call Wrap up time While the Wrap up timer is active calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can perform necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call Wrap up mode can also be activated manually Not Ready by pressing the Wrap up button Log in Log out and Wrap up Status Example lt When the incoming call distribution group
423. rring e 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection e 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e 1 28 4 Timed Reminder e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 451 3 4 Revision History KX TDA0920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features es 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only 452 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 4 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version Bu ee New Contents e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 25 6 Virtual PS e 1 30 1 TIE Line Service TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks e 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail es 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 33 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Changed Contents e 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY ICD Group button e 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Wrap up Timer e 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY e
424. rsation Dual ANSWER MUTE feature DANON Used to monitor an intercom call automatically a hands free VOICE CALL MUTE d sl conversation is not possible Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation Used for System Personal Speed Dialling and storin AUTO DIAL STORE e DEE EN H g g CONF Conference A Used to establish a multiple party conversation FWD DND lt r ole Used to perform FWD or DND Dual feature button Used to insert a pause in a stored number With an APT it is PAUSE used as the PROGRAM button Soft Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display SELECT SE select the displayed item or to call the displayed SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button items MODE Used to shift the display to access various features DSS Console Button Usage ANSWER 4 Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on G hold and answer another call with one touch RELEASE Fa Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Feature Guide 239 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to Flexible CO Trunk a different trunk or to another feature button Used to access an extension with one touch Every button is Flexible DSS Direct Station Selection programmed to correspond to an extension DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other f
425. ry Number SDN Extension Idle Line When an extension user goes off hook an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups No Line When an extension user goes off hook no line is selected The extension user must select the desired line to make a call Prime Line When an extension user goes off hook the preset line is selected automatically A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons S CO G CO L CO ICD Group Conditions e Line Preference Override A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or Memory Dialling button e g One touch Dialling before going off hook e To select Idle Line Preference the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed ona COS basis Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 12 2 7 2 Class of Service External Call Block 2 9 2 3 1 2 Trunk Group Local Access Priority 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 Outgoing Preferred Line 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 Outgoing Preferred Line PT Programming Manual 103 Idle Line Access Local Access 500 Trunk Group Number User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 102 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 3 Trunk Ac
426. s Explanation 1 Making a TIE Line Call One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Dial the Extension Number only Example PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 TIE Line TIE Line Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 2011 Extn 3011 A A Dials 3011 Dials 2011 Explanation To use this method it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX e g 10XX for PBX 1 20XX for PBX 2 to allow calls to be routed properly Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials extension number 3011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX 3 334 Feature Guide b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Dial the TIE Line Access Number PBX Code Extension Number 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features TIE Line Access 2 15 1 9 1 TIE Table Own PBX Code Example PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 A Extn 1011 K Extn 1012 Extn 1011 A TIE Line e e e e Dials 7 953 1011 Explanation Dials 7 952 1011 PBX code TIE line access no Extn no TIE Line 1 30 Networking Features PBX 3 PBX Code 95
427. s SDN buttons Co oft Extn 103 C Fedon Extn 101 PDN buttons Co o Q o Co off SDN buttons CG ott Extn 102 TI Green On Extn 101 Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons Co oft Co ott Nz Slow Red Flashing SDN buttons CG ott Extn 103 LU on Extn 102 PDN buttons CL om CL om Co off E SDN buttons Co oft Extn 103 Slow Red Extn 101 Flashing PDN buttons Co of Q cof Co off SDN buttons Co oft Extn 102 STI Slow Green Extn 101 Flashing 4 The Call Held by Ext 103 is Answered by Ext 101 Extn 101 Boss Extn 102 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons CZ om CS on TI Green On SDN buttons GC o Extn 103 CT on Extn 102 PDN buttons CT on TJ on TJ or SDN buttons TJ oh Extn 103 O res on Extn 101 PDN buttons TJ on TJ on T o SDN buttons CT om Extn 102 O res on Extn 101 5 A Call From 222 2222 Arrives at Ext 101 Extn 101 Boss Extn 102 Boss Extn 103 Secretary PDN buttons SDN buttons Tom CT o Extn 103 x STI Rapid Green Flashing TH off Green On Extn 102 PDN buttons SDN buttons CJ o C__ o Extn 103 Co cof gt C Rapid Red C__ o Extn 101 Flashing PDN buttons ot Co cof
428. s One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 1 15 1 Paging 2 9 7 8 4 Paging Group 2 9 8 3 4 Paging Group All Setting 2 9 9 8 4 Paging Group External Pager 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group Example Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Extension Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 fH Be Be Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Paging Group 4 Pager 1 Pager 2 Idle Extension Hunting Group If a called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 2 9 14 3 6 Extension Hunting Group 2 9 15 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Member List 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Incoming Call Distribution Group An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number default 6 two digit group number and name One extension can belong to multiple groups 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribu
429. s heard 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers must not conflict It is also possible to use default Type 1 or Type 2 shown in the following table a b c Extension Numbers Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers Extension numbers consisting of 0 through 9 can be assigned as follows e Numbering schemes 1 64 e Leading number up to three digits e Additional number up to two digits default two digits Feature Numbers A number of up to four digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and Other PBX Extension Numbers Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 through 16 A number of up to three digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard Feature Default Type 1 Type 2 with without KX TDA30 KX TDA600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Extension Numbering Scheme 1 Leading 1 2 10 20 10 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 2 Leading 2 3 11 21 11 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 3 Leading 3 4 12 22 12 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 4 Leading 4 None 13 23 13 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 5 Leading None 14 24 14 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 6 Leading None 15
430. s made using DISA one of the following can be selected through system programming e Disable Busy tone is sent to the caller e Operator The call will be redirected to the operator e AA 0 AA 9 The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number 2 11 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 DISA Intercept Intercept when all DISA ports are busy PS Ring Group External Pager TAFAS Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Not assignable Intercept Routing is not available Intercept Routing for DISA will redirect a call only if all of the Direct Inward System Access DISA ports are busy Once the call reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature the Intercept Routing feature of the extension is used Feature Guide 31 1 1 Incoming Call Features kk By assigning the forward destination of a Virtual PS to a PS Ring Group or external pager and assigning Intercept Routing destinations to the Virtual PS calls to these destinations will be redirected to the Intercept Routing destination of the Virtual PS Programming Example i i 600 is an example of a lt Forward Destination of Virtual PS gt Floating Extension No for the External Pager Ext No of the Virtual PS FWD Destination lt Intercept Destination of Virtual PS gt Intercept Destination Day Lunch Break Night 2
431. s of a group broadcasting group to make a voice announcement After one member answers the call the caller can begin to make an announcement Other members telephones will continue to ring and each member can listen to the announcement by answering the call The caller will hear a confirmation tone every time the members answer the call During the announcement the voices of members will not be heard However the caller can allow specific members to speak making a conference call A maximum of four parties can participate in the conference call simultaneously This conversation can be heard by the other members Broadcasting Group Eight broadcasting groups can be programmed and a maximum of 31 members can be assigned to each group The available destinations as members of the broadcasting group are as follows Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS v Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Ba Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code vi Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code vi Only available when the networking type of the trunk is assigned as private Conference Call The caller can allow members to speak and can contr
432. sabled for each COS The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the Internal Call Block feature when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group gt 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Miscellaneous 2 9 12 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options ICD Group Key Mode 2 9 13 3 5 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member PT Programming Manual 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 621 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 626 Overflow Time 627 Destination When All Busy 628 Queuing Call Capacity 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 630 Queuing Time Table 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 50 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Description Incoming calls directed to an inc
433. se an MSN can be assigned e Ifthe last digit of the MSN is 0 all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously if the specification of each terminal device is available To use the MSN whose last digit is O as an individual MSN system programming is required for each ISDN port Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN Extension 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Extension Setting PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 268 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Description ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol and they may require a service access code to be dialled Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service ISDN Service Access e ISDN Service Button A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation e This feature is not available to an SLT Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for ISDN Service
434. ses an account code for each client the firm can determine what calls were made for the client and can submit a bill to the client according to the client s account code on the SMDR call record There are two methods of entering account codes as follows One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis Mode Description Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired Forced A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk Conditions e An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling eg One touch Dialling e Account Button A flexible button can be customised as the Account button The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code This button is useful because it can be used at any time while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk e Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call including after the call has been disconnected and a reorder tone is heard However if an account code is entered after there is no longer a reorder tone the call will not be stored in the SMDR record e f more than one account code is entered the code entered last is printed out on SMDR e Even in Forced mode emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code gt 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call e PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during
435. sfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call If the destination is not assigned the call will return to the extension Available destination Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS w Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM Feature Guide 173 1 12 Transferring Features 174 Destination Availability VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e One touch Transfer One touch Transfer can be performed by pressing a One touch Dialling button that has been assigned the TRANSFER command and the telephone number of the transfer destination This is useful for transferring calls to an outside destination 31 6 1 Memory Dialling Features e Automatic Transfer by SDN Button or DSS Button Pressing an SDN button or DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can automatically transfer the call to the specified destination gt 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension It is possible through system programming to prevent this feature from operating for extension to extension calls
436. sion For PDN extensions the Walking Extension feature can only be used when all PDN buttons are idle gt 1 28 3 Walking Extension Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Ifa PS has PDN or SDN buttons Wireless XDP Parallel mode cannot be assigned to that PS 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode OHCA Whisper OHCA A PDN extension cannot receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA unless the call is made using a corresponding SDN button 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Alternate Calling Ring Voice It is not possible to temporarily change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice when calling a PDN extension unless the call is made using a corresponding SDN button gt 1 5 3 Intercom Call Delayed Ringing The same delayed ringing setting is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension Delayed ringing can be assigned separately for each SDN button Through system programming it is possible to select whether caller information such as Caller ID is shown immediately on a PS when a call is received while delayed ringing is set SDN buttons can be set to not ring only flash for incoming calls However this setting is not available for PDN buttons The forward no answer timer starts when a PDN extension starts ringing Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings PDN SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 2 8 16 2 8 3 Ri
437. sion in the idle extension hunting group then the original extension in DND mode will ring Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 4 2 3 Timers amp Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Busy Tone DND Tone 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR DND Override 2 10 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Call from CO DND Status Availability Call from Extension DND Status Availability PT Programming Manual 507 DND Override Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 8 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide 75 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Description The FWD DND fixed button or a customised flexible button can display the FWD DND setting status of the extension Using this button the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or cancelled without clearing FWD destination settings FWD DND Button Types Multiple types of FWD DND butto
438. sired interrupting the call to establish a three party conference call is available Conditions e COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature e This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a b c d e f Executive Busy Override Deny 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override or Data Line Security gt 1 11 5 Data Line Security has been set While receiving OHCA gt 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA During a Conference call gt 1 14 1 Conference Features During a doorphone call gt 1 17 1 Doorphone Call While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration During Consultation Hold e This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation gt 1 20 1 Fixed Buttons and 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons FLASH RECALL button HOLD button TRANSFER button CONF Conference button DSS button EFA button Two way Record button Two way Transfer button One touch Two way Transfer button Voice Mail VM Transfer button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Call Monitor 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service
439. sonal System 2 12 6 6 6 Tenant System Speed Dial Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card 400 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Programming Example Tenant No Operator ARS Mode Music Source Syston e peed Dialling 1 Extn 101 Local Access System s System 4 Extended o 5 2 None System Cyclic Tone Tenant Exclusive Floating extn no Extended 3 200 SR BEMI Tenant Exclusive 1 Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator 2 8 3 2 2 Operator amp BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 006 Operator Assignment 2 Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode 2 14 8 ARS 320 ARS Mode 3 Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold 2 8 3 2 2 Operator A BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music on Hold 711 Music on Hold 4 Follows the system assignment for System Speed Dialling 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial 001 System Speed Dialling Number Conditions Tenant to Tenant Call Block The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension not based on the tenant by the Internal Call Block feature 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Calling extensions or doorphone s in the restricted tenant s Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant s Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant s Feature Guide 401 2 2 System Configuration Sof
440. splay telephone of the hotel operator 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel A Charge Du Checkout Billing LCD for Telephone Checkout Billing LCD for Minibar Checkout Billing LCD for Others A tax rate 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Minibar Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Others Charge Item 1 can also be assigned a margin rate which is useful for charging guests an additional rate for using the telephone services 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Margin amp Tax Margin Rate for Telephone It is possible to print out a bill for a guest The bill will show the following items Feature Guide 319 1 27 Hospitality Features 320 Example of Call Billing Sheet Gs SYS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Hotel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Check in 01 JAN 00 06 31PM Check out 03 JAN 00 07 03AM Room 202 Mr Smith 01 01 00 06 52PM 202 01 Call amount 0012 24 30 00084 50 001 02 01 00 06 07PM 202 01 123456789 10 12 00010 20 1234567890 02 01 00 07 30PM 202 01 012345678901234 06 36 00006 60 12345 02 01 00 08 45PM 202 01 0011234567890123 03 00 00003 00 12345 Telephone 104 30 Tax 000 48 Minibar 4 00 Tax 000 36 Others 0 00 Tax Tax Total Tel 41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax 41 3 12 34 56 78 E Mail 12345678 hoteltdapbx ch A programmable title
441. ss by Memory Dialling A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling However Feature Guide 107 1 6 Memory Dialling Features if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk 108 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Description A PT user can access a person or feature by pressing a single button This is activated by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature number in a One touch Dialling button Conditions e One touch Dialling Button A flexible button can be customised as a One touch Dialling button e Full One touch Dialling There is no need to go off hook before pressing the One touch Dialling button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Flexible Button Programming Mode 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 5 Flexible Button Programming Mode 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources
442. ssigned as the manager e Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted through personal programming LCS Mode Set After Answering 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode e To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode setting LCS on off from the PS has no effect gt 1 25 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Two way Recording into the VPS e Two way Record Two way Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Two way Record or the Two way Transfer button An extension number can be assigned to the Two way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension One touch Two way Transfer Button e When all of the VPS ports are busy 288 Feature Guide 1 24 Voice Mail Features a Pressing the Two way Record button sends a warning tone b Pressing the Two way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS e When transferring a trunk call to a mailbox of the VPS users should use the VM Transfer button If using a standard Transfer button users must dial 6 after accessing the VPS
443. st Number Redial data is cleared and Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned on restricting some calls This can be useful to prevent the room extension from being used when no guest is checked in When checking a room extension out the operator can enter customer charges such as minibar charges A guest bill showing these charges as well as call charges can be printed If necessary the guest charge data entered can be edited later and the bill reprinted Room Status Control Mode Pressing a Room Status Control button when the PT is idle allows the hotel operator extension to enter Room Status Control mode When in Room Status Control mode the corresponding Room Status Control button s light flashes red The Room Status Control button that was pressed determines which room status each room extension can be switched to For example if the Check in button was pressed the Check in button s light flashes red and the hotel operator can select which room extensions to check in In addition DSS buttons on the hotel operator s extension or a paired DSS Console show the room status of each extension as follows Light Pattern Status Off Check out Red on Check in Example Use Check in Mode DSS button CT Room101 Rooms 101 and 103 CL Room102 are currently in CT 1 Room103 check in status Nl CTT Room104 CG Check in button Co Room105 CTT Check out button When in Room Status Control mode the hot
444. sword PT Programming Prog 1 PT Programming Manual 112 Manager Password 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 2 1 Control Features 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 1 PC Programming Description This PBX can be programmed and administered using a PC There are two programming methods 1 On site Programming System programming diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly 2 Remote Programming System programming diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location 1 On site Programming Method Description Using the Serial Interface RS The PBX has a Serial Interface RS 232C port which can be used 232C port for either system administration or SMDR gt 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Using the USB port The PC is connected to the USB port of the PBX or a USB port USB Module attached to a DPT Using the LAN interface A CTI LINK card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only or an IP GW4 card KX TDA30 only must be installed Using a modem through an SLT port An RMT card must be installed Assign the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance default 599 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX Using an ISDN TA interface 64 kbps through an ISDN
445. system programming a message box is created for that extension This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the extension Each PT SLT and PS can be assigned its own message box Example PBX H ji i 1 1 Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 210 H SVM Card 2 Floating Extension No 592 default Message Box for Extn 301 Message Recording Limit Up to 125 messages greeting messages and voice messages for extensions with a maximum total recording time of 60 minutes default can be recorded per card This memory is shared between the message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card The recording quality which can be selected through system programming determines the total recording time as follows Recording Quality Recording Time High about 40 minutes Middle about 60 minutes default Low about 120 minutes If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90 of total space on the SVM card or 115 or more voice messages have been recorded on the card the display informs all extension users belonging to that card that the card is almost full Users will hear dial tone 3 when going off hook Feature Guide 215 1 17 Optional Device Features Floating Extension No and Destination An extension user can set incoming calls to b
446. t Inward Dialling 22 igital XDP 168 IL gt Direct In Line 20 irect Dialling In DDI 22 irect In Line DIL 20 irect Inward Dialling DID 22 irect Inward System Access DISA 203 Direct One touch Answering 79 Direct Recording 216 Direct Trunk Access 103 Directed Call Pickup 81 Directory Call Extension Dialling 87 Directory Call Speed Dialling 113 Directory PS 296 DISA AA Service gt DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number 203 DISA Automatic Walking COS 205 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service 203 DISA Intercept Routing Busy 204 DISA Intercept Routing DND 205 DISA Intercept Routing No Answer 205 DISA Intercept Routing No Dial 203 DISA Security Mode 204 i D D D D D D D D D D D D Index DISA gt Direct Inward System Access 203 Display Information 247 Display Lock 113 218 230 Distribution Group Call 51 DND Override 74 DND gt Do Not Disturb DND Paging 74 189 Do Not Disturb DND 69 74 DoorOpen 196 Doorphone Call 194 E E1 Line Service 270 EFA gt External Feature Access 164 Electronic Station Lockout gt Extension DialLock 142 Emergency Call 90 Exception Code Tables 133 Exclusive Call Hold 176 Exclusive Features Table 445 Executive Busy Override 125 Executive Busy Override Deny 125 Extension Controlling Features 322 Extension Dial Lock 142 Extension Feature Clear 324 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 322
447. t of the call charge Conditions If the limit is reached TRS Barring Level 7 is applied gt 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Budget Management for Verified Call If an extension user makes a trunk call with a verification code the call charge will be added to the total for the verification code not the extension 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Each verification code can be assigned a call charge limit Budget Management for Walking COS If an extension user makes a trunk call from an extension using the Walking COS feature the call charge will be added to the extension of the extension user not the extension that the call was made on 1 9 5 Walking COS Pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge AOC service is required for this feature It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line disconnect mode after a warning tone or only to send a warning tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a conversation When multiple extension users are using the same verification code or the same extension through the use of Walking COS simultaneously each caller can have access to the total remaining budget of the extension or verification code Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 2 12 3 6 3 Ver
448. tality Features Conditions e Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card e Ifthe total number of call records exceeds 90 of available memory call records from the extension with the largest number of records will be automatically printed out and the records printed out will be combined in memory into one aggregate record to save space Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Extension PIN 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Checkout Billing LCD for Telephone 2 12 9 6 8 Hotel amp Charge Charge Margin amp Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Minibar Margin amp Tax Tax Rate for Others PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 11 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 321 1 28 Extension Controlling Features 1 28 Extension Controlling Features 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Description Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming or personal programming Extension PIN Personal Identification Number to set features or access his o
449. tation Extension Settings Option 6 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2 10 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 2 10 17 4 3 DSS Console Flexible Button Type Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features PT Programming Manual 418 LCOT Disconnect Time Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 163 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA 164 Description Normally an extension user can only access features within the PBX However when performing External Feature Access EFA the extension user performs features outside of the PBX such as using the transfer services of the telephone company or host PBX When EFA is performed the PBX sends a flash recall signal to the telephone company or the host PBX 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX This feature is only available on trunk calls This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH RECALL button that is set to EFA mode gt 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate Conditions Flash Recall Time The Flash Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port EFA Button A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button It is possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on Consultation Hold e g is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX Consultation Hold a conditio
450. tem System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL STORE Button e 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP e 1 16 Broadcasting Features e 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN e 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration DID Number Notification to the VPS Changed Contents e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates e 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup e 1 15 1 Paging Paging Group e 1 20 1 Fixed Buttons FLASH RECALL e 1 20 3 LED Indication Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button e 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Handover Feature Guide 449 3 4 Revision History e 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR CD Condition Code e 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration e 2 2 4 Time Service Features Using Time Service e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 450 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 3 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 2 0XXX New Contents e 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out e 1 17 9 External Sensor e 1 17 10 External Relay Control e 1 27 Hospitality Features e 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 31 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features e 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear e 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting e 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial e 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Ba
451. tems may vary depending on the version of KX TDA Maintenance Console being used 420 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Description There are two automatic setup features as follows 1 2 Automatic ISDN Configuration Automatic Time Adjustment 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration The ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port a L1 Active Mode b L2 Data Link Mode Cl Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint d TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic 2 Automatic Time Adjustment It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways a Summer Time Daylight Saving Time Setting The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed The PBX clock will be adjusted one hour forward or backward at 2 00AM of the programmed date if enabled through system programming It means 2 00 AM will become 3 00 AM on the start date of the summer time and 2 00 AM will become 1 00 AM on the end date Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set Onthe summertime start date the setting between 2 00 AM and 3 00 AM will not happen Onthe summer time end date the setting between 1 00 AM and 2 00 AM will ring twice b Time Information from Telephone Company Time information can be received on t
452. tension TIE with PBX Code 6 Intercept Routing After setting distribution it may also be necessary to set the following features Feature Description amp Reference Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period Intercept time it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Busy DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing No Destination If a destination is not assigned the call is redirected to the operator gt 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property for TIE channel 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Trunk Property 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table A Port Settings DIL Trunk Property PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide 19 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination Each trunk has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Does the call have its CLI infor
453. tension to Trunk Call Duration 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 502 Trunk Call Duration Limitation Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 167 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Description Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port This is useful to increase the number of telephones without additional extension cards The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described below Features Descriptions Connections Parallel Mode Parallel mode involves the connection of an SLT to APT DPT SLT an APT ora DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port PBX _ ppT HH sLt When parallel mode is enabled the two telephones function as follows Extn 101 Extn 101 e Both share the extension number of the APT Extn 102 telephone connected directly to the PBX main telephone SLT Extn 102 e Either telephone can make or answer a call EXtra Device Port XDP mode involves the connection of an SLT toa DPT SLT XDP Mode DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port SE Unlike parallel mode each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration DPT SLT Extn 101 Extn 105 Digital XDP Digital XDP involves the connection of a DPT toa DPT DPT DPT that is connected to a DPT
454. the assigned number of digits of dialled number excluding a leading number 2 14 2 8 2 Leading Number Leading Number 2 14 2 8 2 Leading Number Additional Number of Digits 2 14 2 8 2 Leading Number Routing Plan Number 321 ARS Leading Number 322 ARS Routing Plan Table Number GI ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading Additional Remain Routing Plan If a dialled number matches a leading number the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional remain number of digits are dialled If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries the leading number entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority Feature Guide 151 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 152 Example Corresponding Dlalied Number Routing Plan Table No Description 039 123 4567 1 039 is found in location 0001 and seven digits assigned additional remain number of digits in location 0001 were dialled The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit 039 654 321 1 039 is found in location 0001 and the Inter digit time expired before the seventh digit is received The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 2 8 4 2 3 Timers A Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter di
455. the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company e g Call Transfer This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash recall signal This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port ISDN CO ISDN Centrex 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting ISDN Centrex Private Networking Connection QSIG Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line The QSIG mode Master or Slave can be enabled on an ISDN port basis ISDN Extension gt 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for extension connection While the extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine PC or a behind PBX can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P P configuration one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port Feature Guide 251 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 252 When the ISDN port is in P MP configuration a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Conditions Overlap En bloc For each ISDN port either Overlap or En bloc can be selected as the dialling method for which the PBX sends telephone numbers to the telephone company The selected dialling method must be offered by the telephone company When Ove
456. the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX Calls can be forwarded from virtual PSs to outside destinations such as cellular phones and then answered as if the user was at an extension within the PBX The following features can be used with cellular phones and other outside extensions Feature Description amp Reference Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Up to 4 cellular phones can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group and receive calls to the group 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Cellular Phone XDP Parallel Mode A PT user can set up to 4 cellular phones to ring in parallel for incoming calls 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group DISA Automatic Walking COS Registered cellular phones are automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through DISA 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Call Transfer From Outside Destination A cellular phone user who answers a trunk call forwarded from the PBX using DISA can transfer that call to an extension within the PBX 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version Feature Guide References 1 25 6 Virtual PS 390 Feature Guide Section 2
457. tinations are blocked for each COS Programming Example Called Party Caller COS 1 COS 2 Cos 3 COS 1 COS 2 Vv Vv COS 3 Vv Vv Vv v Block Explanation a COS 1 extensions can make calls to all extensions b COS 2 extensions can make calls to COS 1 destinations only COS 2 extensions cannot make calls to COS 2 destinations c COS 3 extensions can make calls to COS 3 destinations only COs 2 COS 3 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 Conditions e Restricted extension numbers cannot be used as the parameter of a feature setting e g FWD e All extensions can make an Operator Call gt 2 2 5 Operator Features regardless of Internal Call Block e This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on the basis of the COSs assigned to the extension and doorphone port 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 38 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 13 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1 64 2 9 10 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 2 11 1 5 1 Doorphone COS 2 11 6 5 4 External Relay COS Number PT Programming Manual
458. ting N e Call Waiting e Busy tone e Intercept Routing Busy DND Conditions Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension Is the trunk group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX Reorder tone TRS Barring applies Y Sends the call to Re the trunk BW to the operator o Destination A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned Private as the networking type gt 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Feature Guide 353 1 30 Networking Features e To establish a QSIG network gt 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features each ISDN QSIG connection in a TIE line network must have the port on one Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX assigned as a master port and the port on the other Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX assigned as a slave port TIE Line Network Connection Example Extn 2000 Extn 1000 IS A Master 5 Extn 2999 Extn 1999 Is C Slave Extn 3000 Extn 3999 e TIE Line Call by Own PBX Extension Number TIE line calls can be made using your own PBX extension numbering scheme 1 64 Telephone Company on DID No 4567 1 1 Trunk S i Destination 1033 Interface An viv de Ey B E 3 Outside Caller Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 1033 Dials 123 4567 Dials 1033
459. ting extension numbers 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 206 Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features Flowchart A DISA call from an outside party is received Is there an idle port on an MSG card The call is routed to an operator Yes DISA Delayed etc DISA Intercept when All Answer time expires DISA Ports are busy The PBX answers the call E DISA Mute amp OGM Start Time A after Answering expires The OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling 77 gt d RE 7 Is the first digit dialled DISA First Digit Time When No Dial expires What method is assigned for DISA Intercept Routing No Dial Operator Disable AA 0 AA 9 The call is routed to an Y The call is redirected to operator The call is the destination assigned y disconnected to AA O or AA 9 es R The OGM stops y y To To Is a second digit dialled DISA Second Digit Time for Automated Attendant expires Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service The PBX receives the dialled digits and checks the dialled number the call is routed to the destination What is the DISA security mode Continued on next page Feature Guide 207 208 1 17 Optional De
460. tion DDI gt Direct Dialling In DID gt Direct Inward Dialling DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF gt Dual Tone Multi Frequency E EFA External Feature Access Feature Guide E FWD Call Forwarding G G CO Group CO ICD gt Incoming Call Distribution IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer ISDN gt Integrated Services Digital Network L L CO gt Loop CO LCS Live Call Screening LED gt Light Emitting Diode M MCID Malicious Call Identification MSN Multiple Subscriber Number N NDSS Network Direct Station Selection O OGM Outgoing Message OHCA gt Off hook Call Announcement OPX Off Premise Extension P MP Point to multipoint P P Point to Point PDN gt Primary Directory Number PIN Personal Identification Number PRI gt Primary Rate Interface PS Portable Station PT Proprietary Telephone S CO gt Single CO SDN Secondary Directory Number SLT gt Single Line Telephone SMDR gt Station Message Detail Recording SVM gt Built in Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide U X TAFAS Trunk Answer from Any Station TEI gt Terminal Endpoint Identifier TRG gt Trunk Group TRS Barring Toll Restriction Call Barring UCD gt Uniform Call D
461. tion PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 382 Feature Guide 1 31 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 1 31 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Description This PBX supports the connection of IP proprietary telephones IP PTs which function almost identically to normal PTs However they connect to the PBX over a Local Area Network LAN and send and receive calls using Internet Protocol IP IP PTs have two Ethernet ports for connection primary and secondary They are connected to the PBX through a network hub or other splitting device and can have a PC connected to the secondary Ethernet port Connection Example y m y 0 4 U O Primary Secondary Ethernet Port Ethernet Port BR Main Office Branch Office Fee re eran SSES E Conditions e Hardware Requirement An IP EXT card e P PT registration is required through system programming before an IP PT can be used with the PBX An IP PT cannot be used unless an extension number is assigned For details on how to register IP PTs refer to the Information about IP Proprietary Telephones leaflet e The following features cannot be used with an IP PT XDP gt 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone OHCA gt 1 8 4 3 Off hook C
462. tion extension 100 Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 16 2 10 2 DIL Table amp Port Settings DIL DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night Tenant Number VM Trunk Group PT Programming Manual 421 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 450 DIL 1 1 Destination Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 21 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID DDI number to a preprogrammed destination Each DID DDI number has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Is the DID DDI number found in the DID DDI table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode CLI works Yes Is the CLI destination assigned Is the DID DDI destination for the time mode assigned No AA The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DID DDI destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routi
463. tion Group Group Settings 2 9 13 3 5 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX PS Ring Group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features Feature Guide 397 2 2 System Configuration Software 398 Example j 5 VM Group D Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 Floating Extn No 601 Name Sales 1 VG Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Floating Extn No 602 Name Sales 2 Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 JE JE Extn 103 Extn 104 There are two types of VM groups as follows Type Description VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features One SLT port can belong to only one group VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features One DPT port can belong to only one group gt 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 9 16 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings 2 9 17 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings DTMF Group System Settings 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 2 9 21 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM Ex
464. tion code PIN 9 21 1 4567 5 DI Outside Party d SC i 211 4567 Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 2001 1 Dials 8 02 9 211 4567 Dials 8 02 verification code entry feature no verification code verification code PIN 9 211 4567 Explanation Case 1 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 TIE line trunk group number TRG 2 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and the telephone number 211 4567 The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because the COS of TRG 1 COS 3 is blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 Case 2 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 TIE line trunk group TRG2 verification code entry feature number x verification code verification code personal identification number PIN Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and the telephone number 211 4567 2 Ifthe specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX 2 the call is connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 Feature Guide 343 1 30 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company A e e mr e Trunk 4 211 4567 Trunk Gaz l XK iTRG3 TIE Line Network of PBX 2 eg SEN SE PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 952 9 211 4567 PBX Code 952 TRG 1 COS 3 Interfac TIE Lin
465. tion of the Extensions 2 7 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection KX TDA600 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 9 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 2 9 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port XDP Mode for S Hybrid port Parallel Telephone Ringing for S Hybrid port 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel PT Programming Manual Feature Guide 1 11 Conversation Features 600 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode User Manual References 1 8 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone Feature Guide 171 1 11 Conversation Features 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 172 Description The Calling Party Control CPC signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the analogue trunk when the other party hangs up To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone Conditions e CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls and for outgoing trunk calls e If your telephone company sends other signals similar to CPC it is recommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls e Ifa CPC signal is detected during a Conference call 1 14
466. tn 103 Extn 102 Green Flashing A EI Rapid Green Off Off Flashing CTT Red On STT Rapid Red ST Rapid Red Flashi Flashi a Green On Extn 102 SET Rapid Green RU 101 Flashing cD off Extn 101 Flashing Flashing Conditions General e A flexible button of a PT and a PS can be customised as a PDN or SDN button A flexible button on a DSS Console can be customised as an SDN button e An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons e f none of an extension s PDN buttons are idle the extension will not receive incoming calls including Call Waiting Therefore it is strongly recommended for PDN extensions to have at least three PDN buttons e Through COS programming it is possible to select whether extensions can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming e Up to eight different extensions can assign SDN buttons corresponding to the same PDN extension e When a PDN extension has an idle CO button or ICD Group button calls will arrive on the following buttons according to the following priority Incoming intercom calls to an ICD group ICD Group button gt PDN button Incoming trunk calls S CO button gt G CO button L CO button PDN button Incoming trunk calls to an ICD group ICD Group button S CO button G CO button L CO button PDN button When multiple calls of the same status e g on hold are on a PDN extension the status of the newest call
467. to callers to callers V PBX PBX MSG MSG MSG Card Card Card Total message recording time Total message recording time 8 minutes max 8 minutes max Feature Guide 1 17 Optional Device Features Note When MSG card expansion has been completed the new MSG card is blank all necessary messages will need to be stored in the card This can be done in two ways a By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card b By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using the Maintenance Console then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed e The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers e Recording Methods a Record voice messages through the extension telephone b Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music port Note Record voice messages only avoid the recording of music e After recording messages a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation e Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message The longer one is applied e Record a message when traffic is light early morning or late evening e When the manager tries to record a messag
468. tput Data General The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port a Trunk call information incoming outgoing b Intercom call information outgoing c Log in Log out information d PBX error log 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information e Hospitality feature information gt 1 27 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY f Printing Message information 1 26 2 Printing Message Memory for SMDR A specified number of call records can be stored in the PBX If more calls are originated or received the oldest record is overwritten by the newest one With KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 when an EMEC MEC card is installed the number of SMDR records that can be stored will increase SMDR Format Type and Contents The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming Feature Guide 303 1 26 Administrative Information Features 304 Pattern A 80 digits without call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 2 25 4 8 10 3 01 02 02 10 03AM 1200 01 lt I gt 12345678901234567890 5 15 00 00 00 NA 01 02 02 10 07AM 1200 01 lt l gt 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 10 15AM 1200 01 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 30AM 123 01 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM_ 1234 01 lt I gt ABC COMPANY12345678 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 lt D gt CDE9876 lt I gt Q COMPANY 0 05 00 01 05
469. tus Group Line Status S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Off Idle Green on This extension is using the line Slow green This extension is holding the line flashing Moderate green This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattended flashing Conference Rapid green Incoming call Incoming call flashing Privacy Release Red on Incoming call Other This extension is for another extensions are logged out of the extension using all trunks incoming call Another in the trunk distribution group extension is group using the line Another extension has the line on Feature Guide 1 20 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Line Status Button Incoming Call Intercom Line Distribution Light Pattern Trunk Status Status Group Line Status S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Slow red Another flashing extension is holding the line Rapid red Incoming call to the incoming call distribution group flashing in Ring distribution method For information on the light patterns of PDN and SDN buttons refer to 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension 3 Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS Off Idle Red on Busy Incoming call 1 DND for trunk calls Rapid red flashing Incoming call 1 Only when Call Pickup by
470. tware Example Tenant 1 Extension User Group 1 Tenant 2 Extension User Group 3 Extension l User Group 2 f EI i Extn 102 Extn 103 j Extension User Group 4 User Group 5 Ki e cos 6 SE SE e SE Z X l Extension l faa User Group 6 l 8 Extn 110 Extn 111 402 Feature Guide Programming Example 2 2 System Configuration Software Caller Called Party COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 Cos 4 Cos 5 COS 6 COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6 Vv w Block Explanation 1 Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number Each tenant must have unique COS numbers Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 Tenant to Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature a Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 can make calls to both Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 and Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 as well as Tenant 1 b Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 can make calls to Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 and Tenant 2 c Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 can make calls to Tenant 3 itself only e An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue The
471. uch Answering Direct 79 One touch Dialling 109 One touch Dialling Full 109 One touch Transfer 174 Operator Call 410 Operator Features 410 Operator Hotel 316 Outgoing Cal Log 111 Outgoing Message OGM 200 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 55 Overflow Feature 61 P Paging 188 Paging Deny 188 Paging DND 74 189 Paging Group 188 397 Parallelled Telephone 168 Password 418 Pause Insertion 97 PC Console 388 PC Phone 388 PC Programming 413 PDN gt Primary Directory Number 118 Personal Identification Number PIN Extension 322 Personal Identification Number PIN Verification Code 147 Personal Speed Dialling 113 Pickup Dialling gt Hot Line 117 Pickup Group Call 81 396 PIN Lock Extension 322 PIN gt Extension Personal Identification Number 322 PIN gt Verification Code Personal Identification Number 147 Port Configuration Extension 392 Portable Station PS Connection 291 Portable Station PS Features 291 Power Failure Connections 433 Power Failure Restart 435 Power Failure Transfer 433 Predialling 85 Primary Directory Number PDN 118 Prime Line Preference 80 102 Printing Message 311 Priority Hunting 51 Privacy Release 187 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 238 PS Directory 296 PS Feature Buttons 297 PS Ring Group 293 398 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 381 PS gt Portable Station Features 291 PT Programming 416 PT gt Proprietary T
472. unded up to the least significant decimal digit 4 Total Call Charge APT user can show the total call charges on the display The call charge is totalled on an extension trunk or verification code basis When a verification code is used the call is charged on the verification code and not the extension that the call was made on 312 Feature Guide 1 26 Administrative Information Features 5 Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verification code For example an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for telephone usage If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit the extension user cannot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge 1 9 2 Budget Management 6 Call Charge Management An extension assigned as a manager can perform the following a Clear the call charges for each extension and verification code b Clear the call charges of all extensions and verification codes c View the call charges Call Charge Reference for each trunk extension or verification code d Set the call charge rate for each trunk group e Print out the total call charges for all extensions and verification codes f Seta budget for each extension and verification code Examples of Call Charge Reference HK IKK KKK KKK IK IK KK IKK IK IK IKK KIKI IK IK KAI KIA
473. unk Number Door Open 55 55 55 External Relay 56 56 56 External Feature Access 60 60 60 ISDN Hold 62 x62 None COLR set cancel 7 0 7 0 7 0 CLIR set cancel 7 1 7 1 Zi Switch CLIP COLP of the Trunk Extension 7 2 X7 2 7 2 MCID 7 3 7 3 None ISDN FWD set cancel confirm 7 5 7 5 None Message Waiting set cancel callback 70 X70 70 FWD DND set cancel Both 710 710 710 FWD DND set cancel External 711 711 711 FWD DND set cancel Internal 712 712 712 FWD DND No Answer Timer set 713 713 713 Group FWD set cancel Both 714 714 714 Group FWD set cancel External 715 715 715 Group FWD set cancel Internal 716 716 716 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 720 720 720 Paging Deny set cancel 721 721 721 Walking Extension 727 727 727 Data Line Security set cancel 730 730 730 Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call off 731 731 731 BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA Automatic Call Waiting set cancel 732 732 732 Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel 733 733 733 Not Ready Mode on off 735 735 735 426 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Feature Default Type 1 Type 2 with without KX TDA30 KX TDA600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Log in Log out 736 736 736 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 739 739 739 Hot Line programme set cancel 740 740 740 Absent Message set cancel 750 750 750 BGM set cancel 751 751 751 Remote Wake up
474. up TRG Settings Main Caller ID Modification Table 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Extension Caller ID Sending Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID 2 12 1 6 1 System Speed Dial 2 12 2 6 2 Caller ID Modification PT Programming Manual 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 490 Caller ID Signal Type Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guide 229 1 18 Caller ID Features 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log 230 Description When an incoming public trunk call with the caller s information e g Caller ID is directed to an extension the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller calling back or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling Example John White 4 Caller s name 20 digits max 12 Dec 10 00AM MON 4 Date and time of a call received NEW Not Answered 4 Answering Status 123456789 4 Caller s number 16 digits max Call Log buttons CTT Own extension CT 1 Incoming call distribution group lt NZ NZ NEW is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed OLD is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed Conditions General e
475. up Call Distribution 1 20 3 LED Indication 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Remote COS Access Feature Guide 123 1 8 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 8 1 8 1 Busy Line Busy Party Features Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Description If the destination or line is busy when a call is made an extension user can set the Automatic Callback Busy feature The PBX will monitor the status of the destination or trunk and when it becomes available will send a Callback ringing to the calling extension to inform the user After the extension answers the callback ringing the previously dialled extension number is automatically redialled or the trunk is automatically seized Conditions If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled If the extension hears a busy tone before dialling the telephone number only the trunk or trunk group is reserved After answering the callback ringing the extension should dial the telephone number An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy The last setting is effective Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously However a maximum of four extension users can set this f
476. up Screen Names extension numbers and the status e g busy of each extension can be monitored on a single screen Calls can also be made and received on this screen Conditions e Hardware Requirements KX T7633 or KX T7636 DPT and USB Module KX T7601 e System Requirements Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition 2000 or XP Windows Me is not supported Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Minimum Requirements CPU Intel Pentium II 350 MHz RAM 64 MB HDD 100 MB available space when installing Display XGA 1024 768 Peripheral Devices Sound Board for recording and replaying features Speaker for listening to voice messages USB port CD ROM drive Feature Guide 1 32 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 6 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 7 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection KX TDA600 2 9 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 5 1 1 Slot Extension Port DPT Type Type for DPT or S Hybrid port DPT Type Location No for DPT or S Hybrid port PT Programming Manual 601 Terminal Device Assignment Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 389 1 33 Cellular Phone Features 1 33 Cellular Phone Features 1 33 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Description This PBX provides features to support
477. up call distribution method gt for idle extensions UCD All extensions hear the Call Waiting tone Ring ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows a Ring The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons simultaneously for only one incoming call additional calls will wait in a queue b UCD Priority Hunting The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located on busy member extensions in a certain order This order depends on the type UCD or Priority Hunting Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied additional calls will wait in a queue Note In method b if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Incoming Call 4 Incoming Call 4 Distribution Distribution Group 1 Group 2 Floating Floating extension extension no 601 no 602 7_ ICD Group 1 601 Call Waiting ICD Group 1 601 Call Waiting ICD Group 2 602 Answering the Call 3 No Reply Redirection UCD or Priority Hunting Method If a call r
478. ure Access EFA mode 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA e Terminate Button A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button e Disconnect Time Only for Flash Recall Mode The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port e This feature outputs an SMDR call record 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR restarts the call timer inserts the automatic pause and checks the TRS Barring level 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring again e The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH RECALL button regardless of the mode that the FLASH RECALL button has been set to in the following situations When acallis made using ARS 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS When a trunk call is made with the INTERCOM button When a trunk call is made with an ICD group button Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 11 1 1 Slot LCO Port Disconnect Time 2 7 19 1 1 Slot T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Disconnect Time 2 7 25 1 1 Slot E1 Port Disconnect Time 2 7 28 1 1 Slot E amp M Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Disconnect Time 2 7 31 1 1 Slot DID Port Disconnect Time 2 10 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2 10 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 2 10 10 4 2 1 Portable S
479. ut occupying a second ISDN line Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer ECT supplementary service e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis e Ifan ISDN port is in P P configuration this feature can be used only when the network supports the explicit linkage option e Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible 1 12 1 Call Transfer e The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 7 14 1 1 Slot BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 2 7 16 1 1 Slot PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY PT Programming Manual None User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 263 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN Description During a conversation using an ISDN line an extension user can add another party and establish a three party conference call using the I
480. vice Features Continued from previous page No Security Trunk Security All Security Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number gt Is the Walking COS Verification ToC for Security Mode Override What is the dialled number Extension No Trunk Access No Feature No Other Floating Telephone No Absent Message Extension No FWD etc The feature is set To D The dialled number is sent to the trunk lt Is the extension Is the extension in DND mode busy The call is directed to the extension The caller hears a ringback tone Is Call Waiting mode on Does the caller press while hearing a ringback tone Call Retry To E Does the destination answer the call DISA Intercept time expires The call is routed to the intercept destination DISA Intercept Routing the call is established No Answer Does the destination answer the call DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept expires Continued on next page the call is established The call is disconnected Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used Feature Guide Code Entry feature number dialled while hearing the reorder Yes Is the correct PIN entered ae D Reorder tone To No
481. vice provided by the telephone company It uses an existing public line as if it were a private line gt 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN QSIG Network QSIG is a protocol based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network of two or more connected PBXs gt 1 30 4 QSIG Standard Features Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network Automatic rerouting of VoIP calls to public trunks is also available in case of network difficulties gt 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Built in Small Call Centre Features An incoming call distribution group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features can be used as a small call centre with the following features Queuing Feature When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Log in Log out Incoming call distribution group members can join Log in or leave Log out the groups manually While logged in a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call Wrap up
482. when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection However if no special programming is performed the connection will be dropped when power returns e The BRI8 one PFT port and BRI4 one PFT port cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual KX TDA30 e Ports 1 and 2 of the LCOT card installed in the least slot number and ports 1 and 2 of the Super Hybrid ports can be used for Power Failure Connections Note The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT card and Super Hybrid ports are automatically kept so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is recovering e The BRI2 one port card can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 2 6 Backup Battery Connection 2 11 1 Power Failure Connections KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 2 6 Backup Battery Connection 2 5 7 SLC16 Card KX TDA0174 MSLC16 Card KX TDA0175 and CSLC16 Card KX TDA0177 2 12 1 Power Failure Connections KX TDA600 2 2 11 Backup Battery Connection 2 7 7 ESLC16 Card KX TDA6174 and EMSLC16 Card KX TDA6175 2 14 1 Power Failure Connections Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 17 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer KX TDA100 KX TDA20
483. wn telephone remotely The following features cannot be used without the PIN a Live Call Screening LCS 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration b Display Lock gt 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log c Walking Extension gt 1 28 3 Walking Extension d Extension Dial Lock gt 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock el Walking COS gt 1 9 5 Walking COS f Walking COS through DISA gt 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN this feature cannot be used without the PIN Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively that extension will become locked and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared
484. work forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt ISDN MSN 123 4567 CFU Destination 01 23 4567 R MSN 123 4567 987 6543 I I I I 1 I I DH d Outside Party Outside Caller 01 23 4567 Dials 123 4567 l Extn 1011 Extn 1011 MSN 123 4567 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Outside Party 01 23 4567 Dials 123 4567 y Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company The feature requires the MSN service gt 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 258 Feature Guide 1 21 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features e COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature Programming Manual References PC Programming Manual 2 8 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features ISDN FWD MSN Set Cancel Confirm 2 8 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO amp SMDR CF MSN PT Programming Manual None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 259 1 21 Integrated Services
485. your call right now Please leave a message and I will call you back J The caller leaves a message If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM DTMF Group or the extension in the VM DTMF group by such as the FWD feature when the VPS answers the call the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller dialled number Follow on ID In this case the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number Available Features for Follow on ID a FWD to a Mailbox b Intercept Routing to a Mailbox c Call Transfer to a Mailbox d Listening to a Message in a Mailbox Automated Attendant AA Service Mode The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance VM AA Service AA VM Service It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port from the VM service to AA service or vice versa System Explanation 1 Service Mode Assignment Assign the service mode VM service or AA service to the VM DTMF group to correspond with the assignment of the VPS 2 9 20 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Type Feature Guide 277 1 24 Voice Mail Features 2 DTMF Command Assignment Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings 2 9 19 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Command Recording Message VM
486. z Extn xxxx P Extn xxxx Flexible PBX 1 PBX 2 Numbering Plan PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 e Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 952 1 0 02 953 1 0 2 3 X X953 03 954 2 3 X X954 Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 952 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 m Sending no to PBX 2 952 XXXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 953 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 gt Sending no to PBX 2 953 XXXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 m Sending no to PBX 4 953 XXXX Feature Guide 349 1 30 Networking Features Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 954 XXXxX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 Sending no to PBX 4 X954 XXXX 3 2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Example 350 Extn 1011 TIE Line Network Note Extn 2011 A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 from PBX 1 If the number sent from PBX 1 is an extension number of PBX 2 e g 2011 the call will be received at extension 2011 If not PBX 2 checks the number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match

Panasonic KX-TDA100/200/600 Feature_Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents